Yamaha CP300 Musical Instrument Owner`s manual
Yamaha CP300 is a stage piano designed for professional musicians. It features a Graded Hammer Effect (GHE) keyboard with 88 weighted keys, providing a realistic playing experience. The AWM2 sound engine delivers authentic piano sounds, along with a variety of other instruments. The CP300 also has a built-in recorder, allowing you to capture your performances. With its versatile features and high-quality sound, the Yamaha CP300 is an excellent choice for any musician looking for a professional-grade stage piano.
advertisement
OWNER’S MANUAL
STAGE PIANO
EN
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
AC INLET
SUSTAIN
ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL
SOSTENUTO SOFT AUX
IN
MIDI
OUT THRU
USB OUTPUT OUTPUT
L/MONO
INPUT
L/MONO
92-469- ➀
(rear)
2
CP300 Owner’s Manual
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING-
When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
8.
This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.
1.
Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply.
9.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.
2.
Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual.
10.
The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity.
11.
Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
3.
This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4.
Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
12.
Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged.
5.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
6.
Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.
13.
Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs.
7.
Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided.
15.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured
BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
CP300 Owner’s Manual
3
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.
• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
Do not open
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Water warning
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If you notice any abnormality
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
Location
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the instrument, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.
4
CP300 Owner’s Manual (1)B-9
1/2
Connections
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Handling caution
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Saving data
Saving and backing up your data
such as a computer.
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
(1)B-9
2/2
CP300 Owner’s Manual
5
Introduction
Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Stage Piano CP300. The CP300 features exceptionally high-quality sound, comprehensive features and a variety of editing functions—making it suitable for a wide range of applications, including live performance and recording.
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the CP300. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
About this Owner’s Manual
This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Basic Operation, Reference and Appendix.
Please read this section first.
This section explains the basic functions and how to use them in detail.
Refer to this section while you play the CP300.
This section explains how to make detailed settings for the CP300’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary.
This section contains important reference material, including Voice and Drum Kit lists, and various detailed charts and tables.
• The illustrations and LCD displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. If you wish to use such data for occasions other than personal use, consult a copyright expert.
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/ formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.
Trademarks
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation.
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
6
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Supplied Accessories
• Power cord
• Foot pedal (FC3)
• Owner’s Manual
Main Features
The CP300 gives you the ultimate acoustic grand piano sound—utilizing three-stage dynamic sampling, providing the ability to change tone with the sustain pedal, and adding a subtle, authentic release sound when you lift your fingers from the keys.
Among the advanced features are:
• 88-key “Graded Hammer” keyboard with action that is virtually indistinguishable from an actual acoustic piano.
• Sophisticated AWM synthesis engine and tone generation system, with a maximum polyphony of 128 notes.
Using AWM, the CP300 has 50 original Voices—including a variety of ultra-realistic piano and other keyboard Voices, plus a wealth of authentic sounds of virtually every instrument type.
• High-grade five-band Master EQ, which enables you to control the tone intuitively using sliders on the panel.
• Luscious reverb and chorus effects, plus an enormous variety of other effects that add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound.
• Comprehensive MIDI functions for use with other devices and in larger music production systems.
• Four pedal connectors for maximum expressive capabilities—especially ideal for live performance—and built-in high-quality stereo speakers.
• A powerful, versatile Performance function, which lets you store and instantly recall your custom CP300 settings, including Dual/Split configurations, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel values and Master Edit settings.
• Built-in 16-track sequencer for recording and playing back your keyboard performance, as well as for creating complex multi-instrument arrangements and Songs—up to a maximum 16 parts.
• Master mode, which allows you to independently control up to four external tone generators.
• Comprehensive selection of inputs/outputs and interfaces—including two separate stereo output pairs, stereo inputs, MIDI terminals, and a USB connector.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
7
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Before Using the CP300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CP300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Control Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing the Volume for Each Part (Zone Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Adding a Vibrato Effect to the Sound—Modulation Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Enhancing the Sound with Reverb and Chorus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using the Master Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selecting a Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Recording Your Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Convenient Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
8
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Master Settings—Master Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Master Equalizer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using the Performance Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Handling Performance Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Settings for Song Recording and Playback—Song Settings . . . . . . . 85
Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
MIDI Data Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Program Change List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Preset Performance List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Effect Data Assign Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
CP300 Owner’s Manual
9
Application Index
Listening
Playing
Changing Voices
• Playing different sounds with left and right hands
“Adding a Vibrato Effect to the Sound—Modulation Wheel” on page 34
“Enhancing the Sound with Reverb and Chorus” on page 35
Recording
Settings
Saving
Connecting the CP300 to other devices
Quick solutions
10
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Before Using the CP300
Power Supply Connections
1
Make sure that the instrument’s [POWER] switch on the rear panel is at the OFF position.
POWER
OFF!!
POWER
ON
OFF
2
Connect the supplied power cord to the [AC INLET] jack (page 22) on the
instrument’s rear panel.
3
Connect the other end of the power cord to an AC outlet. Make sure your CP300 meets the voltage requirement for the country or region in which it is being used.
AC INLET jack
Power cord (included)
Using the Pedals
Connect the included pedal (FC3) to the [1 SUSTAIN] jack.
An optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch or FC7 foot controller can alternately be connected to this jack. Also an optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch or FC7 foot controller can be connected to the [4 AUX] jack, and can
be assigned to control a variety of parameters on the instrument (page 33).
AC INLET
SUSTAIN
ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL
SOFT
SOSTENUTO AUX
IN
MIDI
OUT THRU
USB OUTPUT OUTPUT
L/MONO
INPUT
L/MONO
1
SUSTAIN
ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL
2
SOSTENUTO
3
SOFT
4
AUX
FC3/FC4/FC5 FC7
CP300 Owner’s Manual
11
Before Using the CP300
Using Headphones
If you are using a set of headphones, connect them to the [PHONES] jack.
PHONES jack
CAUTION
Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. n If the [SPEAKER] button is lit, this indicates that the built-in speakers sound normally when using the headphones.
Turning the Power On
Make sure the volume setting of the CP300 and external devices are turned down to the minimum.
Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power on.
MIN MAX
MASTER VOLUME
POWER
ON!
POWER
ON OFF
The display located in the center of the front panel lights up.
A
****** PleaseWait ******
****** YAMAHA ******
C
A
Grand Piano 1
C
Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the CP300.
The display will disappear.
B
NO YES
D
B
NO YES
D
12
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Before Using the CP300
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display
You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.
A B CONTRAST
Grand Piano 1
NO YES
EXIT
C
D
Setting the Volume
To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial located at the left of the panel. When you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to the most comfortable listening level.
The level decreases.
The level increases.
MIN MAX
MASTER VOLUME
Terminology
Master Volume: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound.
n The [MASTER VOLUME] dial also controls the volume of the headphones.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
13
Playing the keyboard
Playing the Sounds
Try playing some of the realistic and dynamic CP300 sounds from the keyboard now.
display below appears.
A B
Grand Piano 1
NO YES
C D
In this condition, you can play the keyboard and hear the sound of the selected “Grand Piano 1” Voice.
To change the Voice, press any one of the Voice group buttons located at the right of the panel.
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
Voice group buttons
14
VIBES
8
XG
16
Play the keyboard and enjoy the sound.
14
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
In this section you’ll learn about the fundamental operations of the CP300—the use of the panel buttons and controls and how to restore the CP300’s memory to the factory default settings.
Display Settings—Basic Operation
Each function may have many items or parameters from which you can choose. To select an item or parameter, press one of the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons.
Each parameter in the display corresponds to the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons next to it.
A
GrandPiano1 Choir
Strings E.Bass
B
NO YES
D
C
Sometimes, after you’ve changed the parameter values or settings, you may want to reset them to their normal condition. To do this, simply press the [–] button and [+] button simultaneously.
A B
ClickVolume
100
NO YES
C
D n The TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons are the same shape as the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. Parameters corresponding to button pairs of this shape can all be reset to their default values by pressing both buttons simultaneously.
To execute the operation, press B [+(YES)] button. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.
In general, when a prompt is shown on the upper right of the display, press the appropriate B [– (NO)]
[+(YES)] buttons to execute or cancel the operation.
NO: Cancel
YES: Execute
B A
SaveToMemory Execute?-->
M-001:NewSong.MID
NO YES
C
D
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from a function.
A
Main Set?-->
Octave 0
C
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
CP300 Owner’s Manual
15
Basic Operation
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CP300
The CP300 has a Factory Set function for restoring your CP300’s memory to the factory default settings.
This lets you restore the CP300’s default Voices and Performances, as well as its System and other settings.
Refer to “Factory Setting List” on page 101.
There are two ways you can restore the CP300’s memory to the factory default settings: 1) Set the “Factory Set” parameter in the Other Settings menu, or 2) Turn the power off and turn the power on again while holding the
C7 key (rightmost key on the keyboard).
Method 1
1
Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to access the Other Settings menu.
OTHER SETTING
2
Press the [OTHER SETTING] button repeatedly or use the A [–][+] buttons to call up
“Factory Set” in the display.
B A
FactorySet Execute?-->
MemoryFileExcluded
NO YES
C
D
3
Use the D [–][+] buttons to select either “Memory File Excluded” or “Memory File
Included.”
Storage memory selections:
Memory File Excluded.......................Memory files are maintained.
Memory File Included .......................Memory files are erased.
A
C
A
C
B
FactorySet Execute?-->
MemoryFileExcluded
NO YES
D
Indicates memory files are maintained.
B
FactorySet Execute?-->
MemoryFileIncluded
NO YES
D
Indicates memory files are erased.
n The “Character Code” parameter in the Song File menu does not change (page 84).
16
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Basic Operation
4
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
After the job has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display.
CAUTION
For Factory Set operations that take longer to process, you will see the message “Executing” during processing.
Do not switch the power off while this message is on the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the system to freeze.
Terminology
Method 2
Simultaneously hold down the white key on the right end of the keyboard (C7), and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the CP300.
In this case, the Memory files saved in the storage memory are not erased.
POWER
ON OFF
C7
If you wish to erase Memory files at this time, simultaneously hold down the rightmost white key (C7) and black key (Bb6) together and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the CP300.
POWER
ON OFF
Terminology
Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save Performance files and recorded Songs.
B b
6 C7
CP300 Owner’s Manual
17
Basic Instructions
Turning the Power On
First, turn the power on and set up the keyboard before playing.
• Before Using the CP300 (pages 11
POWER
ON!
ON OFF
Selecting and Playing a Voice
The CP300 features an exceptionally wide variety of Preset Voices for playing in virtually any musical style. Try searching through the Voices to find your favorites.
Terminology
Preset: Refers to data loaded to the internal memory of the CP300 before being shipped from the factory.
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
VIBES
8
XG
16
Combining Voices and Playing Them on the
Keyboard
The CP300 allows you to play several different Voices together in a layer, or play one Voice with your left hand while you play a different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right. Try out some of the variations and experiment with your own Voice combinations.
• Playing Different Voices Simultaneously (page 27)
• Combining Voices—Dual (page 29)
• Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split
Create Your Own Original Voices
Once you’ve explored your favorite Voices and feel comfortable with them, try branching out creatively and use the editing features to make your own original Voices.
• Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit (page 56)
Connecting to a Computer and MIDI devices
• Connecting to External Audio Equipment (page 88)
• Connecting to External MIDI Equipment (page 90)
• Connecting to a Computer (page 92)
MUSIC P TION SY RODUC NTHESIZ
ER
18
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Basic Instructions
Recording Your Performance and Playing It Back
Recording and playing back your performance is exceptionally easy. The
CP-300 allows you to record up to sixteen independent parts, letting you record the left- and right-hand parts separately—and lets you build up a complete, multi-instrument Song by recording each part one-by-one.
• Recording Your Performance (page 42)
• Other Recording Techniques (page 46)
• Handling Song Files (page 81)
• Playing Back Songs (page 49)
Terminology
On the CP300, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes.
TRACK
2 1 3-16
REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SYNCHRO START
Using the Performance Functions
The useful Performance functions enable you to store and recall the entire
CP300 settings all together. These include the Dual/Split settings, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel settings and Master
Edit settings. If you have any original Voices you’ve created, you can save these to a Performance as well.
• Using the Performance Functions (page 73)
• Selecting a Performance (page 40)
• Performance Parameters (page 74)
• Handling Performance Files (page 76)
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
9
2
ORGAN 2
10
3
HARPSI.
11
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
12 13 14
7
BASS
15
VIBES
8
XG
16
PERFORMANCE
PERFORM.FILE
Using as a Master Keyboard
The Master mode of the instrument enables you to control up to four external tone generators (or four separate instrument parts on one multi-timbral tone generator).
This effectively lets you play four different MIDI instruments at one time. Once you’ve created your custom Master settings, you can save them to a Performance as well.
• Using the Master Mode (page 39)
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
MASTER
• Master Settings—Master Edit (page 53)
MASTER EDIT
CP300 Owner’s Manual
19
Control Names and Functions
Basic Operation
Control Names and Functions
Front Panel
4
POWER
ON OFF
1 2
5 6
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
7
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
MIN MAX
MASTER VOLUME
SONG
VOLUME ZONE CONTROL
8
MASTER
) @
PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE 1
$ & ( º ™
TRACK
SONG FILE MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
2 3-16
A
SONG SELECT REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG SETTING
DOWN UP MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
9 TEMPO NEW SONG SYNCHRO START ! # % ^ * ¡ C
£
3
PHONES A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3
1
Pitch Bend wheel
Controls the pitch bend effect.
2 Modulation wheel
Controls the modulation effect.
3
[PHONES] jack
For connection to a pair of stereo headphones.
4 [POWER] switch
For turning the power on or off. The power is turned on if the button is set to this position: . The power is turned off if the button is set this way: .
5
[MASTER VOLUME] dial
Adjusts the overall volume.
6 [SONG VOLUME] slider
Adjusts the volume of the Song playback.
7
[ZONE CONTROL] sliders
These four sliders adjust the output level for each Layer parts
(up to four). Turning on the [MASTER] button switches the function assigned to the [ZONE CONTROL] sliders.
8 [MASTER] button
Turning on the [MASTER] button switches the CP300 to function as a Master keyboard.
9 [MASTER EDIT] button
Enables selection of the settings for the Master mode.
)
[PERFORMANCE] button
Switches the Performance on/off.
!
[PERFORM.FILE] button
Enables selection of Performance File settings, such as saving and deleting Performance data, and making other settings for
Performance files.
20
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Control Names and Functions
™ ¢
B CONTRAST
NO YES
D
EXIT
∞
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO
§
E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3
CLAVI.
VIBES
¶ • ‚ ¤ ›
VOICE EDIT SPLIT REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
ª ⁄ ‹ fi
LOW LO-MID fl
MID HI-MID HIGH
MASTER EQUALIZER
D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7
@
[TRANSPOSE] button
The Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down, letting you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments.
#
SONG SELECT [
N
][
O
] buttons
Selects a Preset Song or one of your recorded Songs.
$ TRACK [1], [2], and [3-16] buttons
For turning off the specified track as required so you can practice the corresponding track (the track that is turned off ) on the keyboard.
%
SONG [REC] button
For recording your keyboard performance.
^ SONG [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons
Plays back the Preset Songs or your recorded Songs.
&
[SONG FILE] button
Saves recorded Songs and makes other settings for Song files.
* [SONG SETTING] button
Enables selection of the settings for playback of recorded
Songs.
( [MIDI OUT] button
Switches MIDI transmission on/off.
¡
TEMPO [UP]/[DOWN] buttons
Adjusts the tempo.
º
[PANEL LOCK] button
Switches panel lock on/off. Turning on the button disables the panel operations.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
21
Control Names and Functions
™ A to D [–][+] buttons
For selecting parameters and changing values while viewing the display.
£ Display
For showing various messages and certain settings of the instrument.
¢ [CONTRAST] knob
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
∞
[EXIT] button
Returns to the initial display (the display that first appears when the power is turned on).
§
Voice group buttons
These let you select from sixteen groups of Voices, including grand piano. You can also select a Performance if the
[PERFORMANCE] button is turned on.
¶ [VOICE EDIT] button
Enables selection of detailed settings of the sounds and effects.
•
[SPLIT] button
Allows you to play different Voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard.
ª VARIATION [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons
Enables selection of alternate Voices in the selected Voice group.
‚ [REVERB], [CHORUS] buttons
These add ambience (Reverb) and depth (Chorus) to the sound. You can turn the corresponding effect on or off with a single touch.
⁄
MASTER EQ EDIT [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons
Enables selection of detailed settings for the Master Equalizer.
¤ [SPEAKER] button
Switches the built-in speakers on or off.
‹
[CLICK] button
Switches the click function on or off.
› [MIDI SETTING] button
Enables selection of detailed MIDI settings.
fi
[OTHER SETTING] button
This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the keyboard touch or making fine adjustments to the scale.
fl
[MASTER EQUALIZER] sliders
These five sliders adjust the tone of each band: LOW (low band) to HIGH (high band).
Rear Panel
AC INLET
1
SUSTAIN
ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL
2
SOSTENUTO
3
SOFT
4
AUX
IN
MIDI
OUT THRU
USB
R
OUTPUT
L R
OUTPUT
L/MONO R
INPUT
L/MONO
1 2
1
[AC INLET] jack
Connect the supplied AC power cord here. Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CP300.
2
[ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jacks
For connecting the included pedal (FC3), an optional FC4/5 foot switch, or FC7 foot controller.
3
MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] connectors
For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use of various MIDI functions.
4
[USB] connector
For connecting the CP300 and computer.
3 4 5 6 7
5
OUTPUT [L][R] jacks
These jacks output balanced audio signals, and are for connection to an external device such as a mixer.
6
OUTPUT [L/MONO][R] jacks
These jacks output stereo audio signals (1/4" mono phone plug). For monophonic output, use just the L/MONO jack.
7
INPUT [L/MONO][R] jacks
External audio signals can be input via these phone jacks (1/4" mono phone plug). The sound of an external instrument can be reproduced via the CP300’s speakers. Use 1/4" mono phone plugs. For stereo input from an audio device, connect to both the L/MONO and R jacks.
22
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Listening to the Demo Songs
The CP300 has a variety of specially recorded Demo Songs that effectively showcase each of the instrument’s
Voice groups. Listen to some of these Demo Songs now and hear the wide-ranging capabilities of the CP300.
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
TEMPO SYNCHRO START
SONG
A
C
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
9 10 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
7
BASS
15
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK
OTHER SETTING
DEMO
3 4 2 1
1
Simultaneously press both the [MIDI SETTING] button and the [OTHER SETTING] button.
The Voice group button indicators will flash in sequence.
The “Voice Demo” message appears in the display.
A B
VoiceDemo
SelectVoiceButton
NO YES
C D
2
Press one of the Voice group buttons to listen to the Demo Songs.
The corresponding Voice button indicator lights up and playback starts. Demo Songs provided for each
Voice group will play back in sequence until you press the [STOP] button.
Adjusting the Volume
To adjust the volume level of the Demo Songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial or [SONG VOLUME] slider.
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
MIN MAX
MASTER VOLUME
SONG
VOLUME ZONE CONTROL n Make sure that the [SONG VOLUME] slider is set appropriately. If the [SONG VOLUME] slider is set to minimum, no sound can be heard.
3
Press the button of the Voice group currently being played or the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to stop the Voice demo.
4
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Demo selection display.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
23
Quick Guide
Listening to the Piano Demo Songs
1
Simultaneously press both the [MIDI SETTING] button and the [OTHER SETTING] button.
2
Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the Piano Demo Songs.
The “Piano Demo” message appears in the display.
A
PianoDemo
SelectVoiceButton
C
B
NO YES
D
3
Press one of the Voice group buttons to listen to the corresponding Piano Demo
Song.
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4 5
STRINGS CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
9 10 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
7
BASS
15
8
XG
16
The Piano Demo Songs are assigned to the sound buttons as follows.
Voice Name
1 GRAND PIANO 1
2 GRAND PIANO 2
3 MONO PIANO
4 E. PIANO 1
Piano Demo Song
Stereo sampling
Mono sampling
Dynamic sampling: mezzopiano
Dynamic sampling: mezzoforte
5
6
E. PIANO 2
E. PIANO 3
Dynamic sampling: forte
With Sustain
(with Sustain Sampling)
7 CLAVI. No
(without Sustain Sampling)
8 VIBES With
(with Key-off Sampling)
9 ORGAN 1 No KeyOff
(without Key-off Sampling)
10 ORGAN 2
11 HARPSI.
With String Resonance
No String Resonance
Description
Song recorded in stereo.
Song recorded with a mono sampled sound.
Showcases the Dynamic Sampling feature, with multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic instrument.
Showcases the Sustain Sampling feature, which reproduces the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed.
Showcases the Key-off Samples that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released on an acoustic piano.
Showcases the String Resonance feature that recreates the characteristic resonance of actual piano strings.
24
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Playing Voices
Selecting a Voice
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
2 1
Voice group buttons
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
2
1
Select the desired Voice group button by pressing one of the Voice group buttons.
In this step, press the [GRAND PIANO 1] button.
2
Select the desired Voice by using the VARIATION [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons or the A [–][+] buttons.
The currently selected Voice will sound when you play the keyboard.
Indicates the currently selected Voice
A B
Mellow Piano 1
NO YES
C D
Voice Group
GrandPiano1
GrandPiano2
MonoPiano
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
E.Piano3
Clavi.
Vibraphone
Voice Name
Grand Piano 1
Mellow Piano 1
Rock Piano
Honky Tonk Piano
Grand Piano 2
Mellow Piano 2
Mono Piano 1
Mono Piano 2
Comp. Piano 1
Comp. Piano 2
Chorus E.Piano
Phaser E.Piano
AutoPan E.Piano
Standard E.Piano
DX E.Piano 1
DX E.Piano 2
Synth Piano
Tremolo Vintage E.P.
Vintage E.Piano
Amp.Sim.Vintage E.P.
Phaser Clavi.
Clavi. 1
Wah Clavi.
Clavi. 2
Vibraphone
Marimba
Celesta
Voice Group
Organ1
Organ2
Harpsichord
Strings
Choir/Pad
Guitar
Bass
XG
Voice Name
Jazz Organ
Theater Organ
Rock Organ
Draw Organ
Pipe Organ Principal
Pipe Organ Tutti
Pipe Organ Flute
Harpsichord 8'
Harpsichord 8'+4'
Strings
Synth Strings
Slow Strings
Choir
Slow Choir
Scat
Synth Pad 1
Synth Pad 2
Nylon Guitar
Steel Guitar
Wood Bass
Bass&Cymbal
Electric Bass
Fretless Bass
XG Voice
CP300 Owner’s Manual
25
Quick Guide
About XG Voices
The XG Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Select the XG Voice group first, then select the desired Voice.
2-1
Press the [XG] button.
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
9 10 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
7
BASS
15
8
XG
16
2-2
Simultaneously press the [–] [+] buttons located beside the XG Voice name display, to call up the display for selecting XG Voices.
In this case, press the A [–][+] buttons simultaneously to call up the XG Voice selection display.
A
C
Voice group name Indicates that an XG Voice is selected
B
PIANO XG
00:GrandPiano
NO YES
D
Voice name
The XG Voice selection display can also be called up by pressing both the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons simultaneously, after pressing the [XG] button.
2-3
Use the A [–][+] buttons to select a Voice group.
2-4
Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a specific Voice.
3
Play the keyboard.
26
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Playing Different Voices Simultaneously
The advanced features of the CP300 allow you to do things and perform in ways that are simply not possible on an acoustic instrument. For example, you can play several different Voices together in a layer, or play one
Voice (or even two) layered Voices with your left hand while you play a different Voice (or two) layered Voices with your right.
Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit” on page 56.
Keyboard Part Combinations
The CP300 lets you effectively divide the keyboard into four independent parts: Main, Layer, Left and Left
Layer. Moreover, a different Voice can be assigned to each part.
■
Playing a Single Voice (Main part) (page 25)
You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for normal performance.
Main part
■
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Dual) (page 29)
This lets you play a unison melody with two different instruments, or combine two similar, complementary
Voices to create a thicker sound.
Layer part
Main part
■
Playing Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split) (page 31)
This allows you to play different Voices with your left and right hands. For example, you can play a bass part with your left hand, using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass Voice, and a melody on top with your right hand.
Left part Main part
■ Playing Three Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split and Dual for the
Left part
Layer part
Main part
■ Playing Three Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split and Dual for the
Left Layer part
Left part Main part
■
Playing Four Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split and Dual) (page 30)
Left Layer part
Left part
Layer part
Main part
n The volume level for each Voice part can be adjusted independently. For details, refer to page 28.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
27
Quick Guide
Changing the Volume for Each Part (Zone Control)
The convenient [ZONE CONTROL] sliders allow you to adjust the volume of each part independently while you play the keyboard. Moving a slider up increases the volume while pulling the slider down decreases it.
Left Layer part
Left part
Layer part
Main part
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
SONG
VOLUME ZONE CONTROL
ZONE 1: Main part
ZONE 2: Left part
ZONE 3: Layer part
ZONE 4: Left Layer part n When you play a single Voice (Main part), you can adjust the volume by moving the [ZONE 1] slider. In this case, the [ZONE 2], [ZONE 3] and [ZONE 4] sliders have no effect on the volume.
Turning on the [MASTER] button switches the function assigned to the [ZONE CONTROL] sliders. Refer
to the “Using the Master Mode” on page 39.
MASTER PERFORMANCE
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
28
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Combining Voices—Dual
Using Voices of Different Voice Groups—Dual
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
TEMPO SYNCHRO START
SONG
A
C
2 2 1, 3
Voice group buttons
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
1
Press two Voice group buttons at the same time (or press one Voice group button while holding down another) to enable Dual.
In this step, press the [GRAND PIANO 1] button and the [CHOIR/PAD] button.
The [GRAND PIANO 1] button and [CHOIR/PAD] button light. The selected Voice name will appear in the display.
Main part Layer part
A B
Dual
GrandPiano1 Choir
NO YES
C D
2
Select the particular Voice for each part by using the A [–][+] buttons and B [– (NO)]
[+ (YES)] buttons.
You can also select the Main part Voice by using the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons.
n XG Voices can also be selected. For more information, refer to “About XG Voices” on page 26.
Select the “Honky Tonk Piano” Voice by using the A [–][+] buttons and select the “Scat” Voice by using the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons.
Main part Layer part
A B
HonkyTonkPiano Scat
NO YES
C D
To select three parts—Main, Layer and Left—simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button and press the desired Voice group button.
Main part Layer part
A B
Split + Dual for the Main parts
GrandPiano1 Choir
Strings
NO YES
C D
Left part
CP300 Owner’s Manual
29
Quick Guide
To select four parts—Main, Layer, Left and Left Layer—simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button and press two Voice group buttons.
Main part Layer part
A B
Split + Dual
GrandPiano1 Choir
Strings E.Bass
NO YES
C D
Left part Left Layer part
You can select other Voices by using the A – D letter buttons (A [–][+] to D [–][+]).
n For details about the Split function, refer to page 31.
3
Press any single Voice group button to exit Dual and return to normal play.
Using Voices in the Same Voice Group—Dual
Dual can also be used to select and play Voices in the same Voice group.
1
Press one of the Voice group buttons.
2
Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the desired Voice.
You can also select the Main part Voice by pressing the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons.
3
Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to select another Voice in the same Voice group.
To use identical Voices, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons once.
To use different Voices within the same Voice group, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons repeatedly.
30
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
SONG FILE
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
TEMPO SYNCHRO START
SONG
A
C
2
3
2, 3 1,4,5
[SPLIT] button
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3
CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
4
1
Press the [SPLIT] button to enable Split.
The [SPLIT] button lights.
2
Select a Voice for the right-hand area by pressing one of the Voice group buttons.
In this step, press the [GRAND PIANO 1] button.
Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the “Honky Tonk Piano” Voice.
3
Select a Voice for the left-hand area by simultaneously holding down the [SPLIT] button and pressing one of the Voice group buttons.
In this step, press the [CHOIR/PAD] button.
Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the “Scat” Voice.
Main part
A B
Split
HonkyTonkPiano
Scat
NO YES
C D
Left part
To divide the keyboard into Main, Layer and Left parts, press two Voice group buttons at the same time
(or press one Voice group button while holding down another).
Main part Layer part
A B
Split + Dual for the Main parts
GrandPiano1 Choir
Strings
NO YES
C D
Left part
To divide the keyboard into Main, Layer and Left Layer parts, simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button and press two Voice group buttons.
Main part
A B
Split + Dual for the Left parts
Grand Piano 1
Strings E.Bass
NO YES
C D
Left part Left Layer part
To divide the keyboard into four parts—Main, Layer, Left and Left Layer—perform both the above operations (last two sentences) in order.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
31
Quick Guide
4
Specify the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range).
The default setting (factory setting) is “F#2.” (If you do not need to change the split point, skip this step.)
F
#
2 Center “C” (C3)
To Change the Split Point Setting
4-1
Simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button and use the D [–][+] buttons to specify the split point.
There is also a quicker, more intuitive way: instead of using the D [–][+] buttons, simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button and press the appropriate key on the keyboard.
A B
SplitPoint
F#2
NO YES
C D
Split point n The Main part and Layer part of the split point are specified simultaneously. If you wish to independently change the split point for each part, you can call up the Other Settings menu and use the “Split Point” parameter to set the
Main part split point and use “Split Point 2” to set that of the Layer part (page 69).
4-2
Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main display.
5
Press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split and return to normal play.
32
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Using the Pedals
AC INLET
SUSTAIN
ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL
SOSTENUTO SOFT AUX IN OUT
MIDI
THRU
USB OUTPUT OUTPUT
L/MONO
INPUT
L/MONO
1
SUSTAIN
ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL
2
SOSTENUTO
3
SOFT
4
AUX
FC3/FC4/FC5 FC7
CAUTION
Make sure that the power is off when connecting or disconnecting any pedal. n • By connecting a pedal to the [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jack, you can use the pedal to control one of various
• Depending upon the pedal that is connected to the [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] connector, the effect produced by operating the pedal (on/off, dynamics, etc.) might be reversed. Refer to the “Pedal Type” parameter in the Other
• The function of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button can be assigned to the pedal connected to the [2 SOSTENUTO]/[3
SOFT]/[4 AUX] jacks. Refer to the “Pedal Play/Pause” parameter in the Other Settings menu (page 70).
The [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jack is set initially for use with the following functions (factory default setting).
Sustain Pedal (1 SUSTAIN jack)
This jack is for connecting the included FC3 foot pedal. The pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. Connect the included pedal (FC3) to this jack and press the pedal to sustain the sound.
When Voices of the GRAND PIANO 1 Voice group and the Mono Piano 1 and Comp. Piano 1 Voices are selected, pressing the FC3 pedal activates the instrument’s special Sustain Samples, which accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. The FC3 can also be used to control the half pedal effect on these Voices, recreating the partial damping of strings that is possible on an actual piano. An optional FC4/
FC5 foot switch can also be connected to this jack. However, these foot switches cannot be used to control the half pedal effect. n The depth of the effect produced by the Sustain Samples can be adjusted via the “Sustain Sampling Depth”
parameter in the Other Settings menu (page 69).
Sostenuto Pedal (2 SOSTENUTO jack)
This jack is for connecting an included foot pedal FC3 and an optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch.
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” n Organ, string and choir Voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed.
Soft Pedal (3 SOFT jack)
This jack is for connecting an included foot pedal FC3 and an optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch. The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing. n The depth of the Soft pedal can be adjusted via the “Soft Pedal Depth” parameter in the Other Settings menu
AUX Pedal (4 AUX jack)
This jack is for connecting an optional FC7 foot controller.
This AUX Pedal can be assigned to control a variety of parameters on the instrument. Refer to the “Pedal 4"
parameter in the Voice Edit menu (page 62).
CP300 Owner’s Manual
33
Quick Guide
Bending Notes—Pitch Bend Wheel
Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. Try out the Pitch Bend wheel while pressing a note on the keyboard.
Raises the pitch
Lowers the pitch
Pitch Bend wheel
Adding a Vibrato Effect to the Sound—Modulation Wheel
The Modulation wheel applies vibrato to the sound. The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied to the sound. Try out the Modulation wheel with various Preset Voices while playing the keyboard.
Maximum
Minimum
Modulation wheel n Keep in mind that many of the Preset Voices are not set with a Modulation effect. (This is to ensure the most natural sound on these acoustic instrument Voices.) However, the Modulation wheel can be effectively used to control user-programmable effects, as well as alter the sounds of a connected MIDI tone generator.
n Various functions can be assigned to the Modulation Wheel. Refer to the “Modulation” parameter in the Voice
n To avoid accidentally applying Modulation or other effects to the current Voice, make sure the Modulation Wheel is set to minimum before you start playing.
34
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Enhancing the Sound with Reverb and Chorus
The effect processing of the CP300 features both System Effects and Insertion Effects.
System Effects—Reverb and Chorus
System Effects are applied to the overall sound, whether it be a Voice, an entire Performance, a Song, etc. Each part can be given a different amount of System Effect processing.
[REVERB] button
[CHORUS] button
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
Reverb
The reverb effects add a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or small club.
Refer to “Effect Type List” on page 114 for more information on the preset reverb types.
Pressing the [REVERB] button alternates between On and Off.
The indicator lights if reverb is turned on. n You can select a reverb type via the “Reverb Type” parameter in the Voice Edit menu, and adjust the reverb depth
for the selected Voice via the “Reverb Send” parameter (page 58).
n Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied for these Voices: GRAND
PIANO 1, GRAND PIANO 2 Voice groups and Mono Piano 1, Mono Piano 2, Marimba and Celesta Voices.
Chorus
The chorus effects use various types of modulation processing, including flanger and phaser, to enhance the sound in a variety of ways.
Refer to “Effect Type List” on page 114 for more information on the preset chorus types.
Pressing the [CHORUS] button alternates between On and Off.
The indicator lights if chorus is turned on.
You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] button on the panel and by setting the
temporary. That is, if you select another Voice, the chorus setting for the previous Voice is cancelled.
The “Chorus On Off ” parameter setting is saved for each Voice. That is, if you select a given Voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. n You can select a chorus type via the “Chorus Type” parameter in the Voice Edit menu and adjust the chorus depth
“Chorus On Off ” parameter (page 59).
Insertion Effects
Insertion effects can be applied individually to each part. Insertion effects are mainly used to directly process a single part. The CP300 has three separate Insertion Effect blocks, letting you apply different effects on up to
three parts from Main, Layer, Left and Left Layer parts (page 27).
n You can select an Insertion type via the “Ins. Type” parameter in the Voice Edit menu, and adjust the Insertion
effect depth for the selected part via the “Dry/Wet Balance” parameter (pages 59, 60).
The CP300 also has a Variation effect that can be used as either a System effect or Insertion effect. Refer to
can be controlled only by the use of MIDI messages.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
35
Quick Guide
Equalizer (EQ)
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room, or to change the tonal character of the sound. EQ divides the sound into several frequency bands, and adjustments are made by raising or lowering the level of each band.
By adjusting the sound according to the genre—classical music being more refined, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic—you can draw out the special characteristics of the music and make your performance more enjoyable.
Two separate EQ sections are available on the instrument: Part EQ and Master EQ.
Part EQ
The Part EQ is applied to each Voice.
Gain
Low Gain High Gain
Freq.
Low Freq.
High Freq.
n You can adjust the part’s low and high frequency via the “EQ Low Freq.” and “EQ High Freq.” parameter in the
Voice Edit menu. You can also adjust the part’s low- and high-range gain via the “EQ Low Gain” and “EQ High
Gain” parameters (pages 60, 61).
Master EQ
Master EQ is applied to the final, overall (post-effect) sound of the instrument.
When the corresponding slider is set to center, the equalizer level is set to normal.
Gain
+
Q (frequency bandwidth)
0
Freq.
–
5 bands LOW LOWMID MID HIGHMID HIGH
However, the last gain setting by the slider or Master EQ Edit menu will remain in effect.
values will not be affected by Performance recall, incoming MIDI data and Song playback.
36
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Quick Guide
Key Transposition—Transpose
The CP300’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to
“+5,” playing a C key produces a pitch of F. In this way, you can play a Song as though it were in C major, and the CP300 will transpose it to the key of F.
Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose the entire keyboard. With just the press of a button, you can reconfigure the transpose setting. For details about setting the amount of transposition, see below. The indicator will light when a transpose setting other than “0” is selected.
1 [TRANSPOSE] button
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
TEMPO SYNCHRO START
SONG
A
C
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
2 3
1
Press the [TRANSPOSE] button.
The amount of transposition in semitone units appears in the display.
A
C
B
Transpose
Keyboard 0
NO
D
Amount of transposition
YES
2
Press the D [–][+] button to transpose down or up as required.
You can set the range from -12 semitones (down one octave) to 12 semitones (up one octave) in semitone steps.
Transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard.
The transposition range:
-12: -12 semitones (down one octave), 0: normal pitch, 12: 12 semitones (up one octave) n You can set the keyboard’s Transpose via the “Transpose” parameter in the Other Settings menu, when the
[TRANSPOSE] button is turned on (page 69).
n The Transpose setting affects transmitted MIDI data.
3
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Transpose setting.
n The edited Transpose settings will be erased after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory
Backup’s Transpose setting to On in the Other Settings menu, the current Transpose setting will remain in effect
when you turn the power off and back on again (page 71).
CP300 Owner’s Manual
37
Quick Guide
Using the Click
Pressing the [CLICK] button turns Click or the metronome sound on and off.
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
TEMPO [DOWN][UP] button
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
1, 2
1
Press the [CLICK] button to start the click.
Adjusting the Tempo
1-1
Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.
The “Tempo” parameter will appear in the display.
A B
Tempo
120
NO YES
C D
Tempo
To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10-500), use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] or the
D [–][+] buttons.
To reset the tempo to the default setting, press the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] or the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.
Default setting: 120 (If a Song has been selected, the Song tempo is used.)
1-2
Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the Main display.
2
Press the [CLICK] button to stop the click sound.
n The click will not start after the Song is stopped. If you wish to start the click, press the [CLICK] button again. n The click will stop when Song playback is paused.
38
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Using the Master Mode
The Master mode allows you to divide the keyboard into a total of four independent areas (called “Zones”). Each Zone can be assigned to different MIDI channels and have different Control Slider functions. This makes it possible to control up to four tone generators simultaneously from a single keyboard, and to control Voices of an external tone generator over several different channels, in addition to the internal Voices of the CP300 itself.
Press the [MASTER] button to turn the Master mode on.
Turning on the Master mode also enables the “Master Edit” settings for this function.
For details, refer to page 53.
MASTER PERFORMANCE
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
Example: Connecting to external tone generators
ZONE 4
ZONE 2
MIDI CH4
External tone generator
Voice Voice
MIDI CH3
MIDI CH2 MIDI CH1
ZONE 3
ZONE 1
External MIDI synthesizer/tone generator
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
Left Layer part
(ZONE 4)
Left part
(ZONE 2)
ZONE 1: Main part
ZONE 2: Left part
ZONE 3: Layer part
ZONE 4: Left Layer part
ZONE CONTROL
Internal tone generator
Layer part
(ZONE 3)
Main part
(ZONE 1) n While the Master mode is turned on, the “MIDI Out Channel” parameter in the Master Edit menu will be enabled for MIDI channel assignments. n If you turn the power off and on again while the Master mode is on, the function will be turned off.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
39
Selecting a Performance
All settings of the entire CP300 can be saved together in a group, referred to as a “Performance.” A Performance includes
Dual/Split settings, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel settings and Master Edit settings. For details
on Performance settings, refer to page 73.
A total of 64 Preset Performances are supplied with the CP300. The Preset Performances consist of 32 Yamaha original Voices and 32 default Performances (Grand Piano Voices). Try some of the Preset Performances and listen to the sound.
Terminology
Preset Performance file: A single file that includes data of 64 different Preset Performances.
1, 5 2 2
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
3
1
Press the [PERFORMANCE] button to enter the Performance mode.
The [PERFORMANCE] button flashes.
2
Choose a Performance by pressing one of the Voice group buttons.
Playing the keyboard sounds the Performance indicated in the display. The parameters shown in the
Performance Play display are briefly explained below.
Hold this down to view all Voices of the parts
Hold this down to view the Performance file name
A
A01.Piano+Pad
Performance name
Number
(Select the number by pressing one of the Voice group buttons.)
A to D
(Select “A” to “D” by pressing the
VARIATION [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons.)
B
A01.Piano+Pad
GrandPiano1 WarmPad
NO YES
C D
Voice names (Main and Layer only)
3
Press the VARIATION [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons to select one of the Performance variations,
A to D.
A single Performance can include up to four different Performances (A to D). “A” and “B” features the
Yamaha original Voices. “C” and “D” contains the default Performances (Grand Piano Voices).
4
Play the keyboard.
5
Press the [PERFORMANCE] button to exit the Performance Play mode.
The [PERFORMANCE] button lamp turns off. The Voice selection will return to the Voice selected before entering the Performance.
You can exit the Performance yet keep the current Voice used in the Performance by simultaneously holding down the B [– (NO)] button and pressing the [PERFORMANCE] button.
40
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Recording Your Performance
This chapter explains how to record your performance using the CP300’s versatile recording features. For example, you can record just the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since the
CP300 lets you record up to sixteen tracks separately, you can build up a complete, multi-instrument Song by recording each part one-by-one.
About the Recording Features of the CP300
Unlike conventional audio recording (such as to an MD recorder or cassette tape recorder), the CP300 records your keyboard playing as performance data. In other words, while an MD records the actual sounds, the
CP300 records the physical “moves” and settings that create the sound—including which notes are played, the timing they were played with, the Voice(s) used, and the tempo value. This type of recording has the advantage of allowing you greater editing flexibility and smaller data size. n If you want to record the sounds of your performance as audio data, you can do so by connecting an MD recorder
or other recording device to the [OUTPUT] connector (page 88).
Song
On the CP300, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and preset tunes.
Song (performance data)
Demo Songs Preset Songs
Recorded
Songs
CP300 Owner’s Manual
41
Recording Your Performance
Recording Your Performance
3
MASTER
PERFORMANCE
TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2
3-16
SONG FILE
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
TEMPO SYNCHRO START
SONG
A
C
2
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO
E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3
CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
1 3 5 4,6 n The Performance mode is automatically turned off if the CP300 is set to recording or recording standby while
Performance mode is on.
1
Press the SONG SELECT [
N
] button and [
O
] button at the same time.
Indicates the current measure.
(The words “bar” and “measure” are used interchangeably.)
A B
PresetSong Bar 001
P-000:NewSong
NO
C n “P-000: New Song” is a blank Song provided for you to record your performance.
D
YES
2
In addition to selecting the desired Voice, make sure to set other sound-related parameters, such as reverb and chorus. When you’ve finished making the settings, press the SONG SELECT [ N] or [O] button to return to the “New Song” display.
Using the Click Sound
You can record data while using the Click sound. Press the [CLICK] button in Step 2.
The Click sound is not recorded.
n Refer to page 48 for more information on recording in Dual/Split mode.
3
Select a recording track.
Recording to Track 1:
Press the TRACK [1] button while holding down the [REC] button.
Recording to Track 2:
Press the TRACK [2] button while holding down the [REC] button.
Recording to Tracks 3 – 16:
Press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] button while holding down the [REC] button, then select the desired recording track, 3 – 16. Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the TRACK [3-16] button.
42
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Recording Your Performance
When the recording track has been selected, the indicator for the [REC] button and selected track lights up in red. (Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button again.)
A B
SongRecording Bar 001
P-000:NewSong
NO YES
C D
Set the Tempo, if necessary (page 38).
If this Record Standby display does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ N][O] buttons
the beginning of the Song.
4
Start recording.
You can start recording by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button, or have recording started automatically for you as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. The current measure number is shown in the display during recording. n Song recording can be paused by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again.
5
Press either [STOP] button or [REC] button to stop recording.
Press the [STOP] button to return to the top of the Song.
6
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recording. n To erase recorded data from a track, use the “Channel Clear” parameter in the Song Setting menu for Song
7
Save the recorded Song
When pressing the SONG SELECT [ N][O] button, A [–][+] button or C [–][+] button, a “Song
Changed Save?” message appears in the display. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the file. If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. For details about saving Song files, refer to
A B
SongChanged Save?
NO YES
C D
CP300 Owner’s Manual
43
Recording Your Performance
Re-recording Parts of a Song
This section explains how to record a specific section or part of a Song again.
1
Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the playback display is displayed to move through the measures, or play back the recording and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to rerecord.
If the playback display does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ N][O] buttons once.
Indicates the current measure.
(The words “bar” and “measure” are used interchangeably.)
A B
PresetSong Bar 012
P-000:NewSong
NO YES
C D
2
Select a Voice or Voices for recording, if necessary.
Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previous settings.
3
Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press one of the C [–][+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should start. Similarly, use the D [–][+] buttons to specify how the recording should end.
While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following recording method select display appears.
A B
RecMode ExtraTrackCh=3
Start:Norm End:Replace
NO YES
C D
Starting methods:
Norm: All existing data in the Song will be erased after re-recording starts.
Key On: Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased (when rerecording part of the Song).
Ending methods:
Replace: Existing data following the point at which you stopped recording will be erased.
Punch Out: Existing data following the point at which you stopped recording will remain.
4
Select a recording track, then start recording.
After this, follow the procedure beginning with Step 3 on page 42.
44
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Recording Your Performance
Data Recorded to User Songs
Data recorded to individual tracks:
• Notes played
• Voice selection
• Pitch Bend
• Pedal/Modulation wheel ON/OFF
• Reverb depth (Reverb Send)
• Chorus depth (Chorus Send)
• Insertion effect depth (Dry/Wet Balance)
• Sound brightness (Brightness)
• Resonance effect setting (Harmonic Content)
• Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting (EQ Low Freq.)
• Equalizer’s low-range gain setting (EQ Low Gain)
• Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting (EQ High Freq.)
• Equalizer’s high-range gain setting (EQ High Gain)
• Voice octave setting (Octave)
• Voice volume level (Volume)
• Stereo image of each Voice (Pan)
• Fine tuning of the pitch of two Voices in Dual mode (Detune)
• Volume level changes for each Voice with response to the way you play (Touch Sense)
• Voice Transpose (Transpose)
• Scale (Scale)
• Depth of Soft pedal effect (Soft Pedal Depth)
• Depth of string resonance (String Resonance Depth)
• Depth of sustain sampling (Sustain Sampling Depth)
• Volume of the key-off sound (Key-off Sampling Depth)
• Modulation (Modulation)
• Pitch Bend range (Pitch Bend Range)
Data recorded globally to all tracks:
• Tempo
• Time signature (beat)
• Reverb type
• Chorus type
• Insertion effect type n You can change any of the settings with the exception of note data (including the Octave and Transpose setting) after recording. n You can change the time signature at the beginning of the Song, or at a specific position in the Song, by using the
B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the Song is stopped. n When you record in the Dual or Split mode, the CP300 records each Voice onto a separate track. For details, refer
CP300 Owner’s Manual
45
Recording Your Performance
Other Recording Techniques
Adding Data to or Recording Over an Existing Song
The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank Song
(P-000: New Song). You can also add new performance recordings to existing Songs, or overwrite your previously recorded performances.
1
Press one of the SONG SELECT [ N ][ O ] button then use the A [–][+] button to call up “Memory Song.”
A B
MemorySong Bar 001
M-001:NewSong.MID
NO YES
C D
2
Press the C [–][+] button to select the Song you wish to add data to or record over.
You cannot add data to or record over Preset Songs.
CAUTION
If you record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost.
Changing a Voice or Tempo After Recording
You can change the Voice or tempo after recording to change a Song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a Song.
to “Key On,” you cannot change the Voice or tempo.
1
Select a Song you wish to change.
To select a Song, follow the procedure described in “Adding Data to or Recording Over an Existing
Song” above.
2
To change the Voice or tempo in the middle of the Song, specify the measure at which the change is to be made by using the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the playback display is appeared, or by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record.
If the playback display does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [
N][O] buttons once.
46
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Recording Your Performance
3
Change the settings (Voice, reverb, etc.).
For example, if you wish to change the recorded E. Piano 1 Voice to E. Piano 2, use the Voice group buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to select E. Piano 2.
When you’ve finished making the settings, press one of the SONG SELECT [ N][O] button to return to the Song Select display.
CAUTION
The panel settings made in Step 3 will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution.
4
Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and select a track to change the value.
The indicator for the selected part lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.
CAUTION
Do not play the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Doing so will start recording, erasing the recorded data.
5
Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit the record mode.
When you exit the record mode, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the Song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the Song.
Adjusting the Volume Balance between the Song and the Keyboard
While recording multiple parts one-by-one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance by using the [SONG VOLUME] slider.
Turning off the [MASTER] button lets you adjust the volume for the keyboard performance by using the
[ZONE CONTROL] sliders.
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
Move the sliders to make adjustments in the sound.
SONG
VOLUME ZONE CONTROL
CP300 Owner’s Manual
47
Recording Your Performance
Recording in Dual or Split Mode
When you record in Dual or Split mode, the CP300 records each Voice onto a separate track. The following table shows how tracks are assigned to each Voice.
CAUTION
the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.
In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and Extra Track “n” have been selected for recording.
Panel
Dual
Assigned recording track
TRACK
2 1 3-16
Track 1
Main part
Track 2 Extra
Track 3
Layer part
Extra
Track 4
Extra
Track 5
Extra
Track 6
1
TRACK
2 3-16
Main part Layer part
1
TRACK
2 3-16
Main part
(Track n)
Layer part
(Track n+2)
Split
1
TRACK
2 3-16
Main part Left part
1
TRACK
2 3-16
Main part Left part
Dual+Split
1
1
1
1
TRACK
2 3-16
TRACK
2 3-16
TRACK
2 3-16
TRACK
2 3-16
Main part Left part
Main part Left part
Main part
(Track n)
Left part
(Track n+1)
Main Layer part
Left Layer part
Main Layer part
Left Layer part
Main part
(Track n)
Left part
(Track n+1)
Main Layer part
(Track n+2)
Left Layer part
(Track n+3)
Track n = Track 3 to 16
If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceeds 16, Tracks 1, 2, and 3 are used. n Changing between Dual and Split mode in the middle of a Song cannot be recorded.
...
Extra
Track 16
48
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Song Playback
also play the keyboard along with Song playback.
Playing Back a Song
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
2
1, 3 5 4, 5 3
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
6
1
Press one of the SONG SELECT [
N
][
O
] buttons to call up the Song Select display.
A B
PresetSong Bar 001
P-000:NewSong
NO YES
C D
2
Select “Preset Song” or “Memory Song” by using the A [–][+] buttons.
The indication “Memory Song” can be called up when your Song data exists in internal storage memory.
Terminology
Preset: Preset Song Memory. Several Preset Songs (16 Songs) are built into this instrument.
Memory: Refers to the memory storage location for saving recorded data on this instrument.
3
Select the desired Song by using the C [–][+] buttons or SONG SELECT [ N ][ O ] buttons.
Use the D [–][+] buttons to scroll through the Song name, if the name does not fit in the display.
4
Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
repeat playback of a single Song.
• You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during
• When the “Character Code” setting is different than that used when you named the Song, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Change the CP300’s character type (“Character Code”) to that appropriate for the selected
5
Stop playback.
When playback is complete, the Song automatically stops and the CP300 returns to the top of the Song.
If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a Song, press the [STOP] button. Song playback can be paused by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
6
Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the Main display.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
49
Song Playback
Fast Forward and Rewind
The following operations can be performed in the Song select display:
• Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the Song while the Song is played or stopped.
• Press the C [–] button during playback to locate the top of the current Song.
• Press the C [–] button twice (double-click) during playback to start playback from the previous Song.
• Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next Song.
• Press the [STOP] button or simultaneously press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons during playback or while playback is stopped in the middle of the Song to locate the top of the Song.
Resetting the Tempo
Whenever you select a new Preset Song, the tempo is automatically reset to the Song’s original value. n Performance mode is automatically turned off if you start Song playback while Performance mode is on.
Automatically Starting Song Playback by Playing the Keyboard—
Synchro Start
You can pause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Synchro Start). Hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will blink, and the CP300 will wait for
Synchro Start.
In this condition, playback begins as soon as you play the keyboard.
1. Hold down the [STOP] button
2. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button
REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE REC STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SYNCHRO START SYNCHRO START
Synchro Start standby mode n If you press the [STOP] button while waiting, Synchro Start will be cancelled.
Pedal Play/Pause
You can alternately start or pause Song playback by pressing a pedal connected to the CP300’s [ASSIGNABLE
FOOT PEDAL] jack. A pedal connected to the [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jack can be assigned to play and pause Preset Song playback from the “Pedal Play/Pause” parameter in the Other Settings function
This is convenient when performing along with previously recorded parts—it lets you stop and start playback of the recorded backing, while you add parts of your own live.
Turning Part Playback On and Off
While the CP300 is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those parts will not be played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. Turning a playback part off lets you play that part yourself while the other parts play back.
1
TRACK
2 3-16
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3-16
50
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Convenient Functions
This section covers various functions that you’ll find come in handy as you play and perform with the instrument.
Panel Lock Function
The panel lock function can temporarily disable the panel operation and prevent unintended operation during live performance.
1
Double-click the [PANEL LOCK] button (press it quickly twice).
The [PANEL LOCK] button lights. A “PANEL LOCK” message also appears in the display. While the
Panel Lock function is engaged, panel operations will be ignored.
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
A
****** PANEL LOCK ******
Grand Piano 1
B
NO YES
D C
2
To cancel Panel Lock, double-click the [PANEL LOCK] button.
The [PANEL LOCK] button turns off, and the display returns to the previous display. n The Panel Lock function affects all controls, with the exception of the [MASTER VOLUME] dial, the [SONG
VOLUME] slider, the [ZONE CONTROL] sliders, the [MASTER EQUALIZER] sliders, the Modulation wheel, the Pitch bend wheel, and the pedals.
MIDI Transmission On/Off
This parameter specifies whether the CP300 transmits MIDI data to an external MIDI device (On) or not
(Off ).
Pressing the [MIDI OUT] button alternates between On and Off. MIDI messages can be transmitted if the button lamp is lit. MIDI messages cannot be transmitted if the lamp is off.
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
Lit: Enables sending of MIDI messages.
Off: Disables sending of MIDI messages.
n This button is equipped with certain MIDI safeguards and also turns off pedal messages during performance. Even if you turn MIDI transmission off while holding a key, a key-off message will still be transmitted when you release the key. Turning MIDI transmission off also sends the following MIDI messages: Sustain Off, Sostenuto Off, Soft
Pedal Off.
n Keep in mind that if you turn MIDI transmission off, MIDI signals will not be transmitted no matter what other
MIDI transmission settings (in Master Edit and MIDI Settings) are made.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
51
Convenient Functions
MIDI Panic Control
This function serves as a convenient MIDI “panic” switch during performance when using a connected external tone generator. If the connected tone generator continues to sound (stuck notes, etc.) even after you’ve released the keys of the CP-300, using this MIDI Panic control transmits the necessary messages to stop the tone generator from sounding continuously.
Press the [REVERB] button while holding the [MIDI OUT] button.
A “MIDI PANIC SEND” message appears in the display.
REVERB CHORUS MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
A B
*** MIDI PANIC SEND ***
NO YES
C D
MIDI Panic messages: All Note Off, All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers, Sustain Off, Sostenuto Off, Modulation
Depth Off, Pitch Bend Center, Channel Pressure Off
Built-in Speakers On/Off
This parameter specifies whether the CP300’s built-in speakers produce sound (On) or not (Off ).
Pressing the [SPEAKER] button alternates between On and Off. The built-in speakers produce sound if the lamp is lit, and do not sound if the lamp is off.
SPEAKER MIDI SETTING SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
Lit: Speaker sounds normally.
Off: Speakers do not sound.
n If the [SPEAKER] button is lit, the built-in speakers sound normally even when using the headphones.
52
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Master Settings—Master Edit
Reference Section
Master Settings—Master Edit
The Master mode allows you to divide the keyboard into up to four independent areas (zones) which will be effective when the [MASTER] button is turned on. n This setting is retained even after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s Master Setting to Off in the
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
2
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
1, 2 3 4 5
1
Press the [MASTER EDIT] button to call up the Master Setting display.
A B
Slider
Zone1 Volume
NO YES
C D
2
Select the desired item by pressing the [MASTER EDIT] button or by using the A [–]
[+] buttons.
For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 54.
3
Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.
4
Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.
5
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Master Setting display and return to normal play.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
53
Master Settings—Master Edit
Parameters
Slider Settings
For assigning specific functions to each [ZONE
CONTROL] slider.
A
Slider
Zone 1 Volume
C
B
NO YES
D
Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4
Functions/range: Volume, Modulation, Brightness, Harmonic
Content, After Touch, Control numbers 001 – 031, 033 – 095, Off
Default setting: Volume n If you select After Touch or control numbers 001 – 031,
033 – 095, the slider affects only connected MIDI instruments and not the CP300 itself.
Bank Select LSB Settings for MIDI
Transmission to an External Tone Generator
You can select specific Voices or programs on a connected
MIDI device by specifying a Bank Select LSB value, in combination with the Bank Select MSB parameter (above) and the Program Change parameter (below).
A B
SendBankLsb
Zone 1 0
NO YES
C D
Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4
Setting range: 0 – 127
Default setting: 0
The three specified MIDI messages—Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB and Program Change—will be transmitted in the following conditions:
• When turning on the Master mode.
• When changing any of the values of Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB or Program Change when the Master mode is on.
• When selecting a Performance which was saved with the
Master mode on.
Bank Select MSB Settings for MIDI
Transmission to an External Tone Generator
You can select specific Voices or programs on a connected
MIDI device by specifying a Bank Select MSB value, in combination with the Bank Select LSB and Program
Change parameters below.
A B
SendBankMsb
Zone 1 0
NO YES
C D
Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4
Setting range: 0 – 127
Default setting: 0
The three specified MIDI messages—Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB and Program Change—will be transmitted in the following conditions:
• When turning on the Master mode.
• When changing any of the values of Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB or Program Change when the Master mode is on.
• When selecting a Performance which was saved with the
Master mode on.
Program Change Number Settings for MIDI
Transmission to an External Tone Generator
You can select specific Voices or programs on a connected
MIDI device by specifying a Program Change number, in combination with the Bank Select MSB and Bank Select
LSB parameters above.
A B
SendPG#
Zone 1 1
NO YES
C D
Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4
Setting range: 1 – 128
Default setting: 1
The three specified MIDI messages—Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB and Program Change—will be transmitted in the following conditions:
• When turning on the Master mode.
• When changing any of the values of Bank Select MSB, Bank
Select LSB or Program Change when the Master mode is on.
• When selecting a Performance which was saved with the
Master mode on.
54
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Master Settings—Master Edit
Octave Setting for Connected External Tone
Generator
The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or downward in steps of an octave in each zone. You can adjust the offset up or down over a maximum range of two octaves.
A B
Octave
Zone 1 0
NO YES
C D
Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4
Setting range: -2 – 0 – +2
-2 (two octaves lower), 0 (no pitch shift), +2 (two octaves higher)
Default setting: 0
The Octave setting is effective when the [MASTER] button is on.
It also affects the following settings:
Internal: [VOICE EDIT] Octave setting for each Voice
MIDI Output: [MASTER EDIT] Octave setting for each zone
When the [MASTER] button is off, Octave affects the following:
Internal and MIDI Output: [VOICE EDIT] Octave setting for each
Voice
MIDI Transmission Channel for Master Mode
Specifies the channels over which the CP300 transmits
MIDI data from each zone.
A B
MidiOutChannel
Zone 1 Ch1
NO YES
C D
Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4
Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16, Off
Default settings:
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4 n When the [MASTER] button is turned off, the “MIDI
Out Channel” setting in the MIDI Settings menu is used for MIDI channel assignments.
Internal Tone Generator On/Off Status
Turns the sound from the internal tone generator on or off for each part.
B A
InternalTG
Zone 1 On
C
Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4
Settings: On/Off
Default setting: On
NO YES
D
CP300 Owner’s Manual
55
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit
You can make detailed settings for Voice. You can make these settings for each Voice (or each combination of Voices) individually.
Voice Edit—Basic Operation
1
Select the desired Voice or combination of Voices.
For instructions on how to select a Voice, see page 25.
2
Press the [VOICE EDIT] button to access the Voice Edit menu.
3
Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the Voice.
The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected Voice.
Voice Part Display Setup
The Main part Voice can be set.
Main
Main Set?-->
Octave 0
MAIN Voices (displayed with a single
Voice or in Split mode)
Main x Layer
MainXLayer Set?-->
Octave(GrndPno1) 0
Displayed when the MAIN side is in
Dual mode
The Main part Voice and Layer part Voice can be set.
Left
Left x Left Layer
Left Set?-->
Octave 0
The Left part Voice can be set.
Displayed in Split mode
LeftXLeftLayer Set?-->
Octave(GrndPno1) 0
Displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode
The Left part Voice and Left
Layer Voice can be set. n For details about the split point settings between the Main part and Left part, refer to the “To Change the Split
settings for the Layer part and Left Layer part can be changed via the “Split Point 2” parameter in the Other
For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 58.
56
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit
4
Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.
You can change the Voice for each part when Main x Layer or Left x Left Layer is selected in Step 3 (in
Dual mode). The target Voice name will be displayed in parentheses.
A B
MainXLayer Set?-->
Octave(GrndPno1) 0
NO YES
C D
5
Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.
Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.
A B
Main Set?-->
Octave 0
NO YES
C D
6
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.
When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
A B
Main Executing
Octave 0
NO YES
C D n This setting will be retained even if you turn off the power to the CP300. The previous settings will be restored when you turn on the power next time and the same Voice or part you selected before turning the power off will automatically be selected.
7
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Voice Edit settings.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
57
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit
Parameters
When the Voice part is set to Main x Layer or Left x Left Layer, parameters indicated with an asterisk ( * ) below are set for each part’s Voice individually.
Octave*
This allows you to shift the pitch of a note upward or downward in octave steps, over a range of +/- two octaves.
A B
Main Set?-->
Octave 0
NO YES
C D
Setting range: -2 – 0 – +2
-2 (two octaves lower), 0 (no pitch shift), +2 (two octaves higher)
Detune (Dual mode only)
This allows you to finely tune the pitches of the two Voices selected in Dual mode away from each other. Used especially with similar sounding Voices, this creates a warmer, richer sound.
A B
MainxLayer Set?-->
Detune +3
NO YES
C D
Setting range: -20 – +20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the pitch of the Main or Left Voice part’s sound and lower the pitch of the Layer or Left Layer Voice part’s sound. Negative (-) settings will do the opposite.)
Volume*
This allows you to set the volume level for each Voice part.
A B
Main Set?-->
Volume 115
NO YES
C D
Setting range: 0 – 127
Pan (Stereo position)*
This allows you to set the position of the sound in the stereo field, left or right.
A B
Main Set?-->
Pan C
NO YES
C D
Setting range: L64 (hard left) – C (center) – R63 (hard right)
Reverb Type
This determines the types of Reverb effects used for the
Voices of the Main and Main x Layer parts. The Reverb
Type settings here are also used for the Voices of the Left and Left x Left Layer parts, respectively. (These cannot be set independently from the Main and Main x Layer Voices.)
A B
Main Set?-->
ReverbType Hall1
NO YES
C
Settings:
Room
Hall1
Hall2
Stage
Plate
D
Simulates the reverberation of a room.
Simulates the reverberation of a concert hall.
Reverberation is slightly longer than that of Hall 1.
Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound.
Simulates the characteristic sound of a plate reverb.
Reverb Send*
This allows you to control the depth of the reverb effect for the Voice. n The reverb effect is not applied if “Reverb Send” is set to
“0.” n Reverb Send can be set independently for all Voice parts—Main, Main x Layer, Left, and Left x Left Layer.
A
Main Set?-->
ReverbSend 10
C
Setting range: 0 – 127
B
NO YES
D
58
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit
Chorus Type
This determines the types of Chorus effects used for the
Voices of the Main and Main x Layer parts. The Chorus
Type settings here are also used for the Voices of the Left and Left x Left Layer parts, respectively. (These cannot be set independently from the Main and Main x Layer Voices.)
A B
Main Set?-->
ChorusType Chorus
NO YES
C
Settings:
Chorus
Celeste
Flanger
D
Makes the sound more rich and spacious.
Adds warm animation and spaciousness to the sound.
Adds a sweeping, metallic sound, similar to a jet airplane.
Chorus Send*
This allows you to control the depth of the chorus effect for the Voice. n Chorus Send can be set independently for all Voice parts—Main, Main x Layer, Left, and Left x Left Layer.
A B
C
Main Set?-->
ChorusSend 48
Setting range: 0 – 127
NO YES
D
Insertion Effect Type*
This allows you to select from a variety of effects (other than reverb and chorus).
A B
Main Set?-->
Ins.Type SoundBoard
NO YES
C
Settings:
D
DelayLCR
DelayLR
Echo
CrossDelay
Symphonic
Rotary
Tremolo
Delay applied at left, center, and right positions.
Delay applied at left and right positions.
Echo-like delay
Left and right delays are crossed.
Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.
Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker.
Changes the volume level in rapid cycles.
VibeRotor
AutoPan
Phaser
AutoWah
Produces the vibrato effect of a vibraphone.
Automatically pans the sound left to right and back and forth.
Changes the phase of the sound periodically, creating sweeping effects.
Changes the center frequency of the wah filter periodically.
SoundBoard Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard.
AmpSimulator Recreates the distortion effect of a guitar amp.
Compressor This squeezes the dynamic range of a sound, giving the overall sound greater “punch” and impact.
Off No effect
Chorus On/Off
This allows you to set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each Voice. When you select a Voice, the [CHORUS] button on/off setting for the Voice automatically changes according to this parameter’s setting. n Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if “Chorus Send” is set to 0.
A
Main Set?-->
ChorusOnOff Off
C
Setting range: On/Off
B
NO YES
D
Vibe Rotor Speed*
This applies only to the Vibraphone Voice and allows you to change the speed of the vibrato effect (controlled by the
Modulation wheel), simulating the electric rotor on an actual vibraphone.
This is displayed only if “Vibe Rotor” is selected for the
“Ins. Type” parameter.
It enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select the Vibraphone Voice and use the Modulation wheel.
A
Main Set?-->
VibeRotorSpeed 6
C
Setting range: 1 – 10
B
NO YES
D
CP300 Owner’s Manual
59
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit
Vibe Rotor On/Off*
This applies only to the Vibraphone Voice and allows you to turn the vibrato effect (controlled by the Modulation wheel) on and off. This is displayed only if “Vibe Rotor” is selected for the “Ins. Type” parameter. When the
Vibraphone Voice is selected, the Vibe Rotor effect is automatically set to On.
A B
Main Set?-->
VibeRotorOnOff On
NO YES
C D
Setting range: On/Off
Brightness*
This allows you to set the brightness of the sound.
A
Main Set?-->
Brightness 0
C
Setting range: -64 – +63
B
NO YES
D
Rotary Speed*
This allows you to set the rotation speed of the rotary speaker effect. This is displayed only if “Rotary” is selected for the “Ins. Type” parameter.
B A
Main Set?-->
RotarySpeed Slow
C
Setting range: Slow/Fast
NO YES
D
Dry/Wet Balance*
This allows you to set the depth of the Insertion effect.
Some “Ins. Type” settings do not allow you to set the “Dry/
Wet Balance.”
A B
Main Set?-->
Dry/WetBalance D58>W
NO YES
C D
Setting range: D63>W – D=W – D<W63
D63>W (outputs only the original sound with almost no effect applied)
D=W (dry/wet balance is even)
D<W63 (outputs only the sound processed by the effect)
Harmonic Content*
This allows you to adjust the resonance of the sound.
B A
Main Set?-->
HarmonicContent 0
C
Setting range: -64 – +63
NO YES
D
EQ Low Frequency*
This allows you to adjust the low-range frequency of the part EQ.
n For details about EQ or Equalizer, refer to page 36.
A B
Main Set?-->
EQ LowFreq. 80
NO YES
C D
Setting range: 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz
EQ Low Gain*
This allows you to adjust the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut of the low frequencies) of the part EQ.
B A
Main Set?-->
EQ LowGain 0
C
Setting range: -12 dB – +12 dB
NO YES
D
60
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit
EQ High Frequency*
This allows you to adjust the high-range frequency of the part EQ.
A B
Main Set?-->
EQ HighFreq. 4.0k
NO YES
C
Setting range: 500 Hz – 16 kHz
D
EQ High Gain*
This allows you to adjust the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut of the high frequencies) of the part EQ.
B A
Main Set?-->
EQ HighGain 0
C
Setting range: -12 dB – +12 dB
NO YES
D
Assigning the Pedal 1 Function
This allows you to assign a specific function to the pedal connected to the [1 SUSTAIN] jack.
A B
Main Set?-->
Pedal 1 SustainCont
NO YES
C
Settings:
D
Sustain
SustainCont
Sostenuto
Soft
Expression
Off
On/Off switch-type damper (page 33).
Damper function that sustains the sound longer
the further down you press the pedal (page 33)
Makes the sound softer or louder
No function is assigned
Touch Sensitivity (Touch Sense)*
This allows you to determine the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of actual harpsichords and pipe organs does not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these Voices is 127. (See the setting range below.)
A B
Main Set?-->
TouchSense 64
NO YES
C
Setting range: 0 – 64 – 127
0: Softest level
64: Normal touch response; optimum dynamic range
127: Loudest level; fixed (no change in response to touch)
D
Assigning the Pedal 2 Function
This allows you to assign a specific function to the pedal connected to the [2 SOSTENUTO] jack.
A
Main Set?-->
Pedal 2 Sostenuto
C
Setting range: same as “Pedal 1” (above)
B
NO YES
D
Assigning the Pedal 3 Function
This allows you to assign a specific function to the pedal connected to the [3 SOFT] jack.
A B
Main Set?-->
Pedal 3 Soft
NO YES
C D
Setting range: same as “Pedal 1” (above)
CP300 Owner’s Manual
61
Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit
Assigning the Pedal 4 Function
This allows you to assign a specific function to the pedal connected to the [4 AUX] jack.
A B
C
Settings:
Sustain
SustainCont
Main Set?-->
Pedal 4 Expression
NO YES
D
On/Off switch-type damper (page 33)
Damper function that sustains the sound longer
the further down you press the pedal (page 33).
Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.
ReverbSend Adds reverb accents to notes being played.
ChorusSend Adds chorus accents to notes being played.
Brightness Adds brightness accents to notes being played.
Harmonic
Content
Adds resonance accents to notes being played.
AfterTouch Adds after-touch accents to notes being played
(MIDI transmit only)
Ctrl #0 – #119 Adds accents by controllers #0 – 119 to notes being played (MIDI transmit only).
Off No function is assigned.
Assigning the Modulation Wheel Function
This allows you to specify the parameter controlled by the modulation wheel.
A B
Main Set?-->
Modulation Ctrl#001
NO YES
C
Settings:
D
Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.
MainVolume Changes the volume level of notes being played in the Main part. (Displayed only when Main is in
Dual mode.)
LayerVolume Changes the volume level of notes being played in the Layer part. (Displayed only when Main is in
Dual mode.)
LeftVolume Changes the volume level of notes being played in the Left part. (Displayed only when Left is in
Dual mode.)
LeftLayer
Volume
Changes the volume level of notes being played in the Left Layer part. (Displayed only when Left is in Dual mode.)
RotarySpeed Changes the rotary speaker effect’s rotation speed.
VibeRotor
Modulation
Changes the vibraphone’s vibrato speed.
Adds modulation accents.
ReverbSend
ChorusSend
Brightness
Harmonic
Adds reverb accents to notes being played.
Adds chorus accents to notes being played.
Adds brightness accents to notes being played.
Adds resonance accents to notes being played.
AfterTouch Adds after-touch accents to notes being played
(MIDI transmit only).
Ctrl #0 – #119 Adds accents by controllers #0 – 119 to notes being played (MIDI transmit only).
Off No function is assigned.
62
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings
Here you can make settings for MIDI applications, such as MIDI receive/transmit channels and other settings necessary when using the CP300 with other MIDI devices. n These settings will be retained even if you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s MIDI Setting to Off in the Other Settings menu, the MIDI Settings will return to the default (initial) values when you turn on the power next time
n While the Master mode is turned on, the “MIDI Out Channel” parameter and “MIDI Out Select” parameter in the MIDI Settings menu are not effective.
About MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the CP300, or control the CP300 from a connected MIDI device or computer.
MIDI Channels
MIDI data is transferred over 16 channels numbered from 1 through 16. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel.
Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.
Weather Report
News
1
News
2
2
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.
For detailed information on how to set the MIDI transmit channel and the MIDI receive channel, refer to
MIDI Transmit channel 2
MIDI cable
MIDI Receive channel 2
CP300 Owner’s Manual
63
Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings
MIDI Settings—Basic Operation
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
2 5 1, 2
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
3 4 6
1
Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to call up the MIDI Settings menu.
2
Select the desired item by pressing the [MIDI SETTING] button or by using the A [–]
[+] buttons.
For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 65.
3
Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.
4
Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.
Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.
A B
MidiOutChannel
Main Ch1
NO YES
C D
5
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job, if a “Start?” message appears.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to call up the confirmation prompt (“Sure?”). Press the B [+ (YES)] button once again to actually execute the job. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.
A B
InitialSetup Start?-->
NO YES
C D
6
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the MIDI Settings menu.
64
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings
Parameters
MIDI Transmit Channel Selection
This allows you to specify the channel over which the
CP300 transmits MIDI data.
A B
MidiOutChannel
Main Ch1
C
Selects the Voice part
NO YES
D
Specifies the channel
Setting targets: Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer
Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16, Off (not transmitted)
Default settings:
MIDI IN
(Ch 1 – Ch 16)
USB
(Ch 1 – Ch 32)
Ch 1 – Ch 16
Song
Ch 17 – Ch 32
Song
Internal Voices
Keyboard
Left Layer Ch 4 n While the Master mode is turned on, “MIDI Out
Channel” parameter in the Master Edit menu will be enabled for MIDI channel assignments.
MIDI Receive Channel Selection
This allows you to specify the channel over which the
CP300 receives data from the MIDI [IN] or USB connectors.
A B
C
MidiInChannel
Ch1 Song
Selects the channel
NO YES
D
Selects the MIDI receive part
Local Control On/Off
“Local Control On” is a state in which the CP300 produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the CP300 will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the CP300, but don’t want the
CP300 to sound. It’s also useful for recording data to a sequencer/computer and using the sequencer to route the data to the appropriate tone generator or instrument.
B A
LocalControl
On
C
Setting range: On/Off
Default setting: On
NO YES
D
Setting targets: Song, Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer, Keyboard,
Off
Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 32
Default settings:
Ch 1 – Ch 16 Song
Ch 17 Keyboard
Ch 18
Ch 19
Ch 20
Ch 21
Main
Left
Layer
Left Layer
Ch 22 – Ch 32 Off
MIDI Out Select
This allows you to select whether your performance data or
Song playback data is sent via MIDI.
A B
MidiOutSelect
Keyboard
NO YES
C
Settings:
D
Keyboard
Song
Performance data played on the keyboard
Song playback data
Default setting: Keyboard n While the Master mode is turned on, keyboard performance data is transmitted no matter what setting is made here.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
65
Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings
MIDI Receive Parameter
This allows you to specify which types of MIDI data the
CP300 will receive and respond to.
A B
ReceiveParameter
Note On
NO YES
C D
Selects the type of data Turns reception on or off
Type of data: Note, Control, Program, AfterTouch, PitchBend,
SysEx (System Exclusive)
Setting range: On/Off
Default setting: On for all types of data
MIDI Transmit Parameter
This allows you to specify which types of MIDI data the
CP300 will transmit.
A B
TransmitParameter
Note On
NO YES
C D
Selects the type of data Turns transmission on or off
Type of data: Note, Control, Program, AfterTouch, PitchBend,
SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive)
Setting range: On/Off
Default setting: On for all types of data
Transmitting the Default Settings on the Panel
This allows you to transmit initial panel setup data, such as
Voice selection and other settings, to a connected sequencer. This is useful when you record performance data to a sequencer, since it lets you take a “snapshot” of the
CP300 settings you want to use at the beginning of a recorded Song and have those settings automatically called up for you when you play back the Song.
A B
InitialSetup Start?-->
NO YES
C D
Bulk Dump
You can transmit each setting data as the MIDI setting bulk data.
A B
BulkDump Start?-->
Voice
NO YES
C D
Type of data:
Current The data is set on the panel
Performance The data saved to the Performance
Voice The Voice data saved using Voice Edit
MemorySong/
Perf.File
The Performance file, the data saved to the
Song file.
ALL Send each bulk in sequence.
Default setting: Current
Bulk data cannot be transmitted in the following situations:
• Song record/playback
• Song recording standby
• When selecting recording tracks
• Demo Song playback
Bulk data cannot be received in the following situations:
• Song record/playback
• Song recording standby
• When selecting recording tracks
• Demo Song playback
• When transmitting bulk data
• When the message “Receiving bulk data has failed” appears
If the Performance file has 56 files, or the Song file has 112
Songs (1.4 MB), the data transfer will take at least 3 minutes if you are using the USB connection, or 21 minutes if you are using the MIDI connection.
n If you’ve changed the “Character Code” setting (page 84)
since naming a Song and the Song name does not display correctly, bulk data cannot be transmitted.
n Press the B [– (NO)] button or [EXIT] button to cancel the transmission.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn off the power while bulk data is being transmitted. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data.
66
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings
The Other Setting(s) menu provides a variety of settings, generally related to the overall sound and operation of the CP300.
These include detailed settings for touch response, tuning, pedal operation, and more. n The edited Other Settings will be erased after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s Other Setting to On in the Other Settings menu, the current Other Settings’ values will remain in effect when you turn the power off and back on
Other Settings—Basic Operation
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2
STOP
3-16
SONG FILE
PLAY/PAUSE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
TEMPO SYNCHRO START
SONG
A
C
2
3
5
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
9 10 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
7
BASS
15
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
4 6 1, 2
1
Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to call up the Other Settings menu.
2
Select the desired item by pressing the [OTHER SETTING] button or by using the
A [–][+] buttons.
For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 68.
3
Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.
4
Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.
Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.
A B
Transpose
Song 0
NO YES
C D
5
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job (if an “Execute?” message appears).
Pressing the B [+ (YES)] button calls up a confirmation prompt (“Sure?”). Press the B [+ (YES)] button again to execute the job. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.
A B
FactorySet Sure?-->
MemoryFileExcluded
NO YES
C D
6
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Other Settings menu.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
67
Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings
Parameters
Touch Response
This allows you to specify the touch response of the
CP300’s keyboard, or change how the sound responds to the way you play the keys.
A B
TouchResponse Vel= 64
Fixed
NO YES
C D
Settings:
Light A soft playing touch results in a relatively loud sound.
The volume level tends to be consistent.
Medium Standard touch response.
Heavy The keys must be played very strongly to generate loud volume. This setting is best for a wide dynamic range and optimum expressive control of the sound, from pianissimo to fortissimo.
Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how strongly you play the keys. Use the
B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to set the fixed volume level. Setting range of the fixed volume level: 1 – 127
Default setting: Medium
Tune
This allows you to finely tune the pitch of the entire instrument—a useful feature when playing the CP300 along with other instruments or CD music.
A B
Tune
A3=440.0Hz
NO YES
C
Setting range: A3 = 427.0 Hz – 453.0 Hz (0.1 Hz steps)
Default setting: A3 = 440.0 Hz
D
Piano Tuning Curve
This allows you to specify a tuning curve, Stretch or Flat, for the Piano Voices groups (Grand Piano 1, Grand Piano 2 and Mono Piano). Actual piano tuners often employ stretch tuning, extending the upper octaves of the piano slightly to compensate for the perception of the human ear in the higher range. The Flat setting is an acoustically perfect tuning, to be used if the stretch-tuned piano Voice sounds out of tune with other instrument Voices.
A B
PianoTuningCurve
Stretch
NO YES
C D
Settings:
Stretch
Flat
Tuning curve particularly for pianos, with higher octaves slightly “stretched.”
Tuning curve in which the frequency relationships are precisely duplicated in all octaves.
Default setting: Stretch
Scale
This allows you to select different scales or tuning systems for the instrument. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience these tunings with the CP300.
A B
Scale BaseNote=C
PureMajor
NO YES
C D
Settings:
Equal
PureMajor
PureMinor
The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today.
These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords
(root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies—such as choirs and a cappella singing.
Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads.
MeanTone This scale was created as an improvement on the
Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.
Werckmeister The Werckmeister and Kirnberger scales were improvements on the mean-tone and
Pythagorean scales. The main feature of these
Kirnberger scales is that each key has its own unique character. The scales were used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now are often used when performing period music on the harpsichord.
Setting range: C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B
For scales other than Equal, a root note must be specified using the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)] buttons.
Default setting: Equal
68
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings
Split Point
This allows you to specify the split point (the boundary on the keyboard separating the Main part and Left part).
B A
SplitPoint(Main)
F#2
C
Setting range: A-1 – C7
Default setting: F#2
NO YES
D
Soft Pedal Depth
This allows you to specify the depth of the soft pedal effect.
A
SoftPedalDepth
5
C
Setting range: 1 – 10
Default setting: 5
B
NO YES
D
Split Point 2
This allows you to specify the secondary split point (the boundary on the keyboard separating the Layer part and
Left Layer part).
B A
SplitPoint(Layer)
F#2
C
Setting range: A-1 – C7
Default setting: F#2
NO YES
D
String Resonance Depth
This parameter sets the amount or depth of the String
Resonance sound and is effective on certain Voice, such as
Grand Piano 1.
A
StringResonanceDepth
5
C
Setting range: Off, 1 – 10
Default setting: 5
B
NO YES
D
Transpose
The CP300’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments.
A B
Transpose
Keyboard 0
NO YES
C D
Setting targets:
Keyboard
Song
The sound you play with the keys
The sound of Song playback
Setting range: -12 – 0 – +12
-12 (-1 octave) – 0 (normal pitch) – +12 (+1 octave)
Default setting: Keyboard = 0, Song = 0 n The Keyboard settings can only be made when the
[TRANSPOSE] button is turned on (page 37).
n You can also change the keyboard Transpose setting by using the [TRANSPOSE] button. Whichever method you use, the most recently made settings will be effective.
n The Transpose setting affects transmitted MIDI data.
Sustain Sampling Depth
This parameter sets the amount or depth of the Sustain
Sampling sound and is effective on the Mono Piano 1 and
Comp. Piano 1 Voices, as well as on the Grand Piano 1
Voice group.
B A
SustainSamplingDepth
5
C
Setting range: Off, 1 – 10
Default setting: 5
NO YES
D
CP300 Owner’s Manual
69
Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings
Key-off Sampling Depth
This allows you to adjust the volume of the key-off sound
(the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key). This parameter is effective on the Grand Piano 1, Mono Piano 1 and Comp. Piano 1 Voices, as well as on the E. Piano 1,
Clavi. and Harpsi Voice groups.
A
KeyoffSamplingDepth
5
C
Setting range: Off, 1 – 10
Default setting: 5
B
NO YES
D
Pedal Type
This allows you to select the type or polarity of the pedals you use, connected to the [SUSTAIN] pedal jack,
[SOSTENUTO] pedal jack, [SOFT] pedal jack and [AUX] pedal jack. If you are using a Yamaha-recommended pedal
(such as the FC4 or FC5), the Pedal Type need not be changed. However, if you are using a pedal of a different manufacturer, the polarity may be opposite and the effect produced by operating the pedal (on/off, dynamics, etc.) might be reversed. If this happens, you can use this setting to correct the pedal operation.
A B
PedalType
Pedal 1 Make
NO YES
C D
Setting for: Pedal 1, Pedal 2, Pedal 3, Pedal 4
Setting range: Make, Break
Default settings: Pedal 1, Pedal 2, Pedal 3: Make; Pedal 4:
Break
Vibraphone Pedal Mode
This parameter affects only the Vibraphone Voice, and enables you to select whether the Vibraphone sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“Piano
Like”) or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like when playing an actual vibraphone (“Normal”).
A
VibraphonePedalMode
PianoLike
C
Setting range: PianoLike, Normal
Default setting: PianoLike
B
NO YES
D
Pedal Play/Pause
This allows you to assign the Song Play/Pause function to the pedal, letting you start or pause Song playback with your foot. In this setting, the selected pedal (2 – 4) functions in the same manner as the [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel. n If you assign the Play/Pause function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal
in the Voice Edit menu (pages 61 and 62) is disabled.
A B
C
PedalPlay/Pause
Pedal 2 Off
Selects the pedal to which the function will be assigned
NO YES
D
Selects on or off
Setting for: Pedal 2, Pedal 3, Pedal 4
Setting range: On/Off
Default setting: Off for all pedals
Half Pedal Point
This allows you to set the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound. In other words, you can change the point at which the assigned effect begins to be applied, as you press the pedal down. If the effect is a simple on/off type effect, this setting specifies the point at which the effect will be switched on/off (with the exception of the
Expression function).
Refer to the section on assigning the pedal function in the
Voice Edit settings (page 61).
A B
HalfPedalPoint
0
NO YES
C D
Setting range: -2 (effective with the shallowest press) – 0 – +2
(effective with the deepest press)
Default setting: 0
Pitch Bend Range
This allows you to specify the amount of pitch change produced by moving the Pitch bend wheel. This parameter applies only to the manually played sound (not to a connected MIDI device). The value can be set in semitone steps.
A B
PitchBendRange
2
NO YES
C D
Setting range: 0 – 12 semitones (moving the wheel will raise/ lower the pitch by a maximum of 12 semitones or 1 octave)
Default setting: 2
70
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings
Equalizer Lock
This allows you to lock the Master Equalizer settings and prevent them from being changed when selecting a
Performance, or by Song playback and incoming MIDI data.
However, if bulk data (of the Current type) is received, the
Master Equalizer settings will be changed, no matter whether the "Equalizer Lock" is turned on or off. (See Bulk
Dump in the MIDI Settings on page 66.)
B A
EqualizerLock
Off
C
Setting range: On/Off
Default setting: On
NO YES
D
Factory Set
This allows you to reset the CP300 to its default settings.
• The “Character Code” parameter setting does not change
• The “Memory Backup” parameter setting (On/Off ) is reset to the default setting (left column).
• You can specify whether the files in the storage memory are erased or kept.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn off the power during factory set. Doing so could result in damage to the data.
Resets the CP300
A
C
B
FactorySet Execute?-->
MemoryFileExcluded
NO YES
D
Selects whether the memory files are erased or kept
Selecting for storage memory:
MemoryFileExcluded
MemoryFileIncluded
Memory Songs are kept.
Memory Songs are erased.
Memory Backup
This allows you to select specific items and parameters, such as Voice selection and reverb type, to be automatically saved upon shutdown, ensuring that they will not be lost when you turn off the power to the CP300.
If the backup function is turned on for an item, the settings for that item when power is turned off will be in effect the next time power is turned on. If the backup function is turned off for an item, the settings in memory are erased when you turn off the power. In this case, when you turn on the power to the unit, the default settings (the initial
settings) will be used. Refer to the “Factory Setting List” on page 101.
Keep in mind that the backup settings themselves, the files of the storage memory, and Character Code setting
(page 84) are always saved upon shutdown.
A B
MemoryBackUp
Transpose Off
C
Selects the desired item
NO YES
D
Selects on or off
Setting for:
Master
Transpose
Equalizer
ReverbOnOff
SplitPoint
Main/LeftVoice
SongSetting
MidiSetting
OtherSetting
Master Equalizer settings (page 72)
Split Point settings (page 69)
Voice, Keyboard part combinations
Settings for Song recording and playback
Default setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice and
OtherSetting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
71
Master Equalizer Settings
This section explains how to set the Master Equalizer using the Master EQ Edit menu.
n This setting is retained even after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s Equalizer setting to Off in the Other Settings menu, the Master Equalizer settings will return to the default (initial) values when you turn on the power the
Specifies the type
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
Specifies the item Specifies the value MASTER EQ EDIT
[ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons
1
Use the MASTER EQ EDIT [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons to show the Master EQ Edit display.
Master Equalizer type
A B
Equalizer Edit
LowGain 0dB
NO YES
C D
Parameter name Parameter value
2
Set the Master Equalizer type by using the MASTER EQ EDIT [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons or the
B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons.
Setting range: Mellow 1 – 3, Normal, Bright 1 – 3, Edit
Default setting: Edit
3
Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the parameter item.
4
Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.
The contents of the EQ parameters are briefly explained below.
Parameter name
Low Gain
Low Freq.
Low Q
LowMid Gain
LowMid Freq.
LowMid Q
Mid Gain
Mid Freq.
Mid Q
HighMid Gain
HighMid Freq.
HighMid Q
High Gain
High Freq.
High Q
Contents
EQ low-range gain
*1
EQ low-range frequency
EQ low-range resonance
EQ low-middle range gain
*1
EQ low-middle frequency
EQ low-middle resonance
EQ middle range gain
*1
EQ middle frequency
EQ middle resonance
EQ high-middle range gain
*1
EQ high-middle frequency
EQ high-middle resonance
EQ high range gain
*1
EQ high frequency
EQ high resonance
Data Range
-9 dB – +9 dB
*2
32 Hz – 2.0 kHz
0.1 – 12.0
-9 dB – +9 dB
*2
100 Hz – 10.0 kHz
0.1 – 12.0
-9 dB – +9 dB
*2
100 Hz – 10.0 kHz
0.1 – 12.0
-9 dB – +9 dB
*2
100 Hz – 10.0 kHz
0.1 – 12.0
-9 dB – +9 dB
*2
500 Hz – 16.0 kHz
0.1 – 12.0
*1 You can also set the EQ Gain by moving the [MASTER EQUALIZER] slider. Keep in mind that the most recently made settings will be effective.
*2 You can specify the range of the gain from -12 dB to +12 dB on MIDI Input. The display will also indicate from -12 dB to +12 dB.
will not be affected by selecting a Performance, or by Song playback and incoming MIDI data.
72
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Using the Performance Functions
The Performance functions allow you to store edited Voices, including Dual/Split settings, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel settings and Master Edit settings, to the VOICE/PERFORMANCE [1] – [16] buttons. Once they
You can save up to a total of 64 Performances to the VOICE/PERFORMANCE [1] – [16] buttons. A single button can contain four different Performances, A – D.
To select the desired Performance (A – D), use the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons.
Performance file
A Performance file is a single file that includes the data of 64 Performances.
Performance
• Dual/Split settings
• Voice and effect parameters
• MIDI transmit/receive channel settings
• Master Edit settings
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
VIBES
8
XG
VARIATION
15 16
Switch the Performance
(A – D)
Performance D (16 Performances)
Performance C (16 Performances)
Performance B (16 Performances)
Performance A (16 Performances)
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8
XG
16
Performance file = 64 Performances
The current Performance, along with data of 64 Performances, is saved to the storage memory. For details
about recalling a Performance file from storage memory, refer to page 79.
Terminology
Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save Performance files and recorded Songs.
Performance
A01
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
Select the button to save
9 10 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14 15
VIBES
8
XG
16
Recalling a Performance file from storage memory
Storage memory
Performance D
Performance C
Performance B
Performance A
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Preset Performance file
= 64 Performances
VIBES
8
XG
16
Performance D
Performance C
Performance B
Performance A
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 11 12 13 14
Performance file
= 64 Performances
15
VIBES
8
XG
16
Performance D
Performance C
Performance B
Performance A
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 11 12 13 14
Performance file
= 64 Performances
15
VIBES
8
XG
16
CP300 Owner’s Manual
73
Using the Performance Functions
Performance Parameters
The useful Performance function enables you to store and recall all settings of the entire CP300 together, including Dual/Split settings, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel settings and Master
Edit settings. Settings that can be edited and stored to a Performance are called “Performance parameters.”
Parameter menu
VOICE/
PERFORMANCE
Selecting a Voice
*1
Setting Dual
Contents
REVERB Turning the Reverb on/off
MASTER Turning the Master mode on/off
TRANSPOSE
VOICE EDIT
Turning the Transpose on/off
Setting the octave
*1
Setting the volume level
*1
Setting the position of right and left channels
*1
Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode)
*1
Selecting the Reverb type
*1
Setting the Reverb send
*1
Setting the Chorus type
*1
Setting the Chorus send
*1
Turning the Chorus on/off
*1
Selecting the Insertion effect type
*1
Setting the speed of the Vibraphone vibrato effect
*1
Turning the Vibraphone vibrato effect on/off
*1
Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speed
*1
Adjusting the Insertion effect depth
*1
Adjusting the Brightness of the sound
*1
Adjusting the Resonance effect
*1
Adjusting the low-range frequency of the Part equalizer
*1
Adjusting the high frequency of the Part equalizer
*1
Adjusting the low-range gain of the Part equalizer
*1
Adjusting the high range gain of the Part equalizer
*1
Setting the Touch Sensitivity
*1
Setting the Pedal 1 function
*2
Setting the Pedal 2 function
*2
Setting the Pedal 3 function
*2
Setting the Pedal 4 function
*2
Setting the Modulation wheel function
*2
MASTER EQ EDIT Selecting the Master equalizer type
*3
Adjusting the low-range gain of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the low-middle range gain of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the middle range gain of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the high-middle range gain of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the high range gain of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the low-range frequency of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the low-middle frequency of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the middle frequency of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the high-middle frequency of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the high frequency of the Master equalizer
*3
Parameter name
–
–
–
–
–
–
Page
VibeRotorOnOff
RotarySpeed
Dry/WetBalance
Brightness
Edit or Master EQ type name
LowGain
LowMidGain
MidGain
HighMidGain
HighGain
LowFreq.
LowMidFreq.
MidFreq.
HighMidFreq.
HighFreq.
74
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Using the Performance Functions
Parameter menu Contents
MASTER EQ EDIT Adjusting the low-range resonance of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the low-middle resonance of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the middle resonance of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the high-middle resonance of the Master equalizer
*3
Adjusting the high resonance of the Master equalizer
*3
MIDI SETTING Setting the MIDI transmit channel
Setting the MIDI receive channel
Turning Local Control on/off
Selecting Performance from the keyboard or Song data for
MIDI transmission
OTHER SETTING Selecting the Touch Response
Selecting a tuning curve for a Piano Voice
Selecting a scale
Specifying the Split Point (Main)
Specifying the Split Point 2 (Layer)
Changing the key
Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal
Setting the depth of String Resonance
Setting the depth of Sustain Sampling for the Sustain pedal
Specifying the volume of the Key-off sound
Selecting a pedal function for Vibraphone Voice
Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal
Setting the point at which the Sustain pedal starts to affect the sound
MASTER EDIT
Setting the Pitch bend range
Assigning a function to the [ZONE CONTROL] slider
Setting the MSB of the Send Bank Select message
Setting the LSB of the Send Bank Select message
Setting the Program Change message
Setting the octave of the external tone generator
Turning the internal tone generator on/off
Setting the MIDI transmit channel when the Master mode is turned on
Parameter name
LowQ
LowMidQ
MidQ
HighMidQ
HighQ
MidiOutChannel
MidiInChannel
LocalControl
MidiOutSelect
TouchResponse
PianoTuningCurve
Scale
SplitPoint (Main)
SplitPoint2 (Layer)
Transpose
SoftPedalDepth
StringResonanceDepth
SustainSamplingDepth
KeyOffSamplingDepth
VibraphonePedalMode
PedalPlay/Pause
HalfPedalPoint
PitchBendRange
Slider
SendBankMsb
SendBankLsb
SendPG#
Octave
InterITG
MidiOutChannel
Page
*1 The value of the parameter varies depending on the Dual (page 29) and Split (page 31) settings.
*2 The value of the parameter varies depending on the Split settings (page 31).
*3 If the Equalizer Lock parameter in the Other Settings menu is turned on, recalling a Performance from the panel will
not update the parameter settings (page 71).
CP300 Owner’s Manual
75
Handling Performance Files
File displays (accessed via the [PERFORM.FILE] button) enable you to handle and organize files (e.g., save, delete and rename Performance files) from the display.
Setting
Saving a Performance
Renaming a Performance
Saving as a Performance file
Recalling the Performance file from the storage memory
Deleting a Performance file
Renaming a Performance file
Parameter name
Performance
Perf.Name
SaveAs
LoadFromMem.
DeleteFile
RenameFile
Page
Performance File—Basic Operation
A message (information or confirmation prompt) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation.
to take.
3 4
MASTER
PERFORMANCE
TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2
3-16
SONG FILE
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
TEMPO SYNCHRO START
SONG
A
C
2, 3 4
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO
E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3
CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
4 5
1
Prepare the file(s) for handling.
When using the Performance or Save As parameters:
Select the edited Voice or Performance file you want to save.
When using the Perf. Name, Rename File, Load From Mem. and Delete File parameters:
No operations necessary; go on to Step 2 below.
2
Press the [PERFORM.FILE] button to enter the Performance File settings.
3
Select the desired item by pressing the [PERFORM.FILE] button or by using the A [–]
[+] buttons.
A B
Performance Set?-->
A01.Piano+Pad
NO
C
To close the Performance File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.
D
YES
4
Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] to D [–][+] buttons to change the value.
For details about each operation, refer to pages 77 – 80.
5
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Performance File settings.
76
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Handling Performance Files
Saving a Performance—Performance
You can save the edited Performance to one of the VOICE/PERFORMANCE [1] – [16] buttons. For details about the parameters you can store to a Performance and their contents, refer to the “Performance Parameters”
recalling a Performance file from storage memory, refer to page 79.
CAUTION
If you create a Performance by editing an existing Preset Performance file, a new Performance file named
“PresetPerformance.PER” will be made. The Preset Performance file is not overwritten; however, the edited
Performance can be overwritten without any warning. To avoid overwriting the data, save it as another Performance file with the Save As operation or rename the Performance file with Rename File.
A B
Performance Set?-->
A01.Piano+Pad
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1 Select the desired Performance by using the VARIATION [ ▼ ][ ▲ ] buttons or the C [–]
[+] buttons.
The location for saving the Performance can be specified from A01 to D16.
A01
Performance D (16 Performances)
Performance C (16 Performances)
Performance B (16 Performances)
Save
Performance A (16 Performances)
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
CLAVI.
7
BASS
VIBES
8
XG
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Performance file = 64 Performances
4-2
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the Performance file to be deleted.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
77
Handling Performance Files
Renaming a Performance—Perf. Name
This allows you to rename the Performance.
A B
Perf.Name Set?-->
A01.Piano+Pad
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1
Renaming a Performance.
To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons.
To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.
To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons.
To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.
You can use up to 20 characters for a Performance name.
You can change the type of characters on the display using the “Character Code” parameter in the Song
File menu.
4-2
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the Performance file to be deleted.
78
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Handling Performance Files
Saving as a Performance File—Save As
This allows you to save the Performance file as another file, under another file name.
A B
SaveAs Execute?-->
001.PresetPerformance
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1
Name the Performance as described in the “Perf.Name” section (page 78).
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the confirmation prompt (“Sure?”).
To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.
When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.
If storage memory contains one or more Performance files, and you save a Performance file, the CP300 automatically sorts the Songs alphabetically and renumbers them.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the Performance file to be deleted.
Recalling the Performance File from the Storage Memory—Load From Memory
This allows you to recall the Performance file from storage memory. A single Performance file consists of 64 separate Performances. The Performance file in the current memory will be replaced with the selected
Performance file in the storage memory.
A B
LoadFromMem. Execute?-->
001.PresetPerformance
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the desired Performance file to be loaded.
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the confirmation prompt (“Sure?”).
To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.
When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the Performance file to be deleted. n The Performance file loaded from the storage memory is effective after restarting the CP300.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
79
Handling Performance Files
Deleting a Performance File—Delete File
This allows you to delete a Performance file from the CP300’s storage memory. It is not possible to delete a
Preset Performance file and current Performance file.
A B
DeleteFile Execute?-->
001.MyPerformance.PER
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the Performance file to be deleted.
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the confirmation prompt (“Sure?”).
To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.
When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may damage the data of the Performance. n The Performance file in the current memory cannot be deleted. After you delete a Performance file, the CP300 automatically updates the Performance file numbers.
Renaming a Performance File—Rename File
You can rename a Performance file in the storage memory. You cannot change the Preset Performance file.
A B
RenameFile Execute?-->
001.MyPerformance.PER
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1
Name the Performance file as described in the “Perf.Name” section (page 78).
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
After you rename a Performance, the CP300 sorts Performance files alphabetically and renumbers them.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the Performance file to be deleted.
80
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Handling Song Files
File displays (accessed via the [SONG FILE] button) enable you to handle and organize files (e.g., save, delete and rename
Song files) and change characters from the display.
Setting
Saving recorded Songs to the CP300’s storage memory
Deleting a Song from the CP300’s storage memory
Renaming Song files
Changing the type of characters in display
Parameter name
SaveToMemory
DeleteSong
RenameSongs
CharacterCode
Terminology
Song file: On the CP300, a Song file includes both Song data and a Song number.
Page
Song File—Basic Operation
A message (information or confirmation prompt) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation.
information and the appropriate actions to take.
2, 3 3 4
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
1 4 4 5
1
Prepare the file(s) for handling.
When using the Save To Memory, Rename Song and Delete Song parameters:
Use the SONG SELECT [ N] [O] buttons to select the target Song.
When using the Character Code parameter:
No operations necessary; go on to Step 2 below.
2
Press the [SONG FILE] button to access the Song File settings.
3
Select the desired item by pressing the [SONG FILE] button or by using the A [–][+] buttons.
B A
RenameSong Execute?-->
M-001:NewSong.MID
C
To close the Song File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.
NO
D
YES
4
Press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] to D [–][+] button to execute the job or change the value.
For details about each operation, refer to pages 82 – 84.
5
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Song File settings.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
81
Handling Song Files
Saving Recorded Songs to the CP300’s Storage Memory—Save To Memory
This allows you to save recorded Songs to the CP300’s storage memory. Keep in mind that when you turn off the power to the CP300, your recorded Song data will be lost. To permanently save the recorded Song, you must save it to the CP300’s storage memory.
Current memory
This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently selected
Song before playback or recording.
Storage memory
This is a memory area that provides space for saving recorded Songs that would normally be lost when you turn off the power.
A recorded
Song
Save
Memory
Song
Preset
Song
A
SaveToMemory Execute?-->
M-001:NewSong.MID
B
NO YES
C D
The Save To Memory operation is not available for Preset Songs.
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 81.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1 Name the Song.
To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons.
To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.
To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons.
To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.
You can use up to 58 characters for a Song name. If the name is longer than the display, use the C [–][+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll through the name.
You can change the type of characters on the display using the “Character Code” parameter (page 84).
4-2 Press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the confirmation prompt (“Sure?”).
To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.
When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the recorded Song to be deleted.
The Song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” stands for “Memory” and “xx” is a number.
If storage memory contains one or more Songs, and you save a new Song, the CP300 automatically sorts the
Songs alphabetically and renumbers them.
82
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Handling Song Files
Deleting a Song from the CP300’s Storage Memory—Delete Song
This allows you to delete a Song from the CP300’s storage memory. It is not possible to delete a Preset Song.
A B
DeleteSong Execute?-->
M-001:NewSong.MID
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 85.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a Song to delete.
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the confirmation prompt (“Sure?”).
To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.
When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may damage the data of the recorded Song. n After you delete a Song, the CP300 automatically updates the Song numbers.
Renaming Song Files—Rename Song
This allows you to rename Song files. The titles of any Songs can be changed, with the exception of the Preset
Songs and “P-000:NewSong.”
A B
RenameSong Execute?-->
M-001:NewSong.MID
NO YES
C D
For basic operation instructions, refer to page 81.
The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).
4-1
Name the Song as described in the Save To Memory operation (page 82).
4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.
After you rename a Song, the CP300 sorts all Songs alphabetically and renumbers them.
CAUTION
Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the recorded Song to be deleted.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
83
Handling Song Files
Changing the Type of Characters in Display—Character Code
This allows you to change the type of characters that appear on display. The instructions below correspond to
Step 4 in the Basic Operation on page 81.
A B
CharacterCode
International
NO YES
C D
4
Use the D [–][+] buttons to select “International” or “Japanese.”
Settings: International, Japanese
Character List
Japanese
International n File names using the characters shown in gray above will not display correctly if the Character Code setting has been changed.
n The Character Code setting is also reflected in the display for the Performance and Performance file names.
84
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Settings for Song Recording and Playback—
Song Settings
Song Settings—Basic Operation
MASTER PERFORMANCE TRANSPOSE
SONG SELECT
MASTER EDIT PERFORM.FILE
NEW SONG
1
REC
TRACK
2 3-16
STOP PLAY/PAUSE
SONG FILE
SONG SETTING
MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK
DOWN UP
SYNCHRO START
SONG
TEMPO
A
C
2
1, 2 3
3, 4
B
NO YES
D
CONTRAST
EXIT
GRAND
PIANO 1
GRAND
PIANO 2
MONO
PIANO E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3 CLAVI.
VIBES
VOICE EDIT SPLIT
1
ORGAN 1
2
ORGAN 2
3
HARPSI.
4
STRINGS
5
CHOIR/PAD
6
GUITAR
7
BASS
9 10 15 11 12 13
VOICE/PERFORMANCE
14
8
XG
16
VARIATION
REVERB CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING
MASTER EQ EDIT CLICK OTHER SETTING
DEMO
3 5
1
Press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the Song Settings menu.
2
Select the desired item by pressing the [SONG SETTING] button or by using the
A [–][+] buttons.
A B
Quantize Execute?-->
Off
NO YES
C D
3
Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] to D [–][+] buttons to execute the job or change the value.
Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.
4
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job, if an “Execute?” or “Start?” prompt appears.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the confirmation prompt (“Sure?”).
To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.
When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears briefly, then returns to the previous display.
To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.
5
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Song Settings menu. n Save the edited Song data by using the “Save To Memory” operation in the Song File menu.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
85
Settings for Song Recording and Playback—Song Settings
Parameters
Quantize
This allows you to correct the timing of notes you’ve recorded. For example, if the timing of your performance was slightly off in places, you can adjust the notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes. Changes made in Quantize affect the entire Song.
A B
Quantize Execute?-->
SwingRate= 50% 1/8
C
Changes the swing rate
NO
D
YES
Selects the notes for which you can adjust the timing
Quantize timing settings (according to note value):
Off
1/4 .............
Quarter note
1/8 .............
1/12 ...........
Eighth note
Eighth note triplets
1/16 ...........
Sixteenth note
1/24 ...........
Sixteenth note triplets
If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Swing Rate parameter is shown (as a percentage value). Changing the
Swing Rate will make the Song sound more lively and give it more of a swing or jazzy feel.
Setting range: 0% – 100%
If you select “1/8” for correction:
Your keyboard performance
Swing rate = 50%: No swing; straight
Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher): The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed.
Quick Play
This allows you to specify whether a Song that starts at a point other than the first beat of the first measure should be played from the first actual note or from the beginning of the Song. (Some Songs are recorded with initial settings and non-note data at the very beginning of the Song; this parameter allows you to skip those settings and play the
Song from the first note. It also allows you to skip over rests that naturally occur before the pickup note in a Song.)
A B
QuickPlay
On
NO YES
C
Settings:
On
Off
D
Playback from the first note
Playback from the start of the Song (including a rest or blank measure)
Default setting: On
Channel Listen
This allows you to select and audition the recorded contents of a single channel. Playback starts from the first note.
A B
ChannelListen Start?-->
Ch1
NO YES
C D
Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16
Default setting: Ch 1 n Song data consists of 16 channels. Each instrument part is assigned to a specific channel, so for this instrument, the words “channel” and “track” have the same meaning. n Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.
However, for some Songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed.
Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower): The timing of even beat notes is slightly early.
Swing rate = 67%: The timing of even beat notes is moved to the third beat of the triplets.
Default setting: Off
Channel Clear
This allows you to delete data of a single specified channel, or of all 16 channels at once.
A B
ChannelClear Execute?-->
Ch1
NO YES
C D
Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16, ALL (all channels)
Default setting: Ch 1 n Song data consists of 16 channels. Each instrument part is assigned to a specific channel, so for this instrument, the words “channel” and “track” have the same meaning.
86
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Settings for Song Recording and Playback—Song Settings n Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.
However, for some Songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed. n When you clear all channels using the “ALL” parameter, you can overwrite the Song. In this case, an empty Song file having no channel data is saved.
From/To Repeat
This allows you to specify a section within a Song and play it back repeatedly. The section can be specified freely (in measures/beats), and playback repeats after it reaches the point just prior to the beat specified as the end point.
If you start playing back a Song with “Repeat On” selected, a lead-in count starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified part until you press the [STOP] button. If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts.
A B
FromToRepeat RepeatOff
From 001:001 To 002:001
NO YES
C D
Settings: RepeatOn, RepeatOff
Default setting: RepeatOff
If you select “Repeat On,” use the C [–][+] and D [–][+] buttons to specify the range to be repeated during Song playback. n When you select another Song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off.
Time Signature
This allows you to set the time signature of the click.
Specify the numerator of the time signature by using the
C [–][+] buttons and specify the denominator by using the
D [–][+] buttons. For example, to specify 3/4 time, use the
C [–][+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–][+] buttons to select “4.”
B A
TimeSignature
4/ 4
C
Setting range for the numerator: 1 – 16
Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, 8
Default setting: 4/4
NO YES
D
Click Volume
This allows you to set volume of the click sound.
A
ClickVolume
100
C
Setting range: 0 – 127
Default setting: 100
B
NO YES
D
Song Repeat
This allows you to repeatedly play back all Songs or a single
Song selected from storage memory.
When you start playback, the CP300 plays the Song you selected from the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified Songs until you press the [STOP] button.
Press the [STOP] button to return to the top of the Song.
A B
C
SongRepeat Off
PresetSongs
NO YES
D
Settings:
PresetSongs
All
OneSong
MemorySongs
All Preset Songs
All Memory Songs and Preset Songs
One Song selected from the front panel
All recorded Songs
Default setting: PresetSongs
Click Type
This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound.
A B
ClickType
BellOff
NO YES
C D
Setting range:
BellOff
BellOn
Click (standard click sound)
Click and bell
Default setting: BellOff
CP300 Owner’s Manual
87
Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices
CAUTION
First, make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to the minimum. Then turn on the every device in your setup in the order of MIDI master (controllers), MIDI slaves (receivers), then audio equipment
(mixers, amplifiers, speakers, etc.).
1 2 3
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
POWER
ON!!
MIDI master CP300 Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier)
When powering down the setup, first turn down the volume for each audio devices, then switch off each device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then MIDI).
Connecting to External Audio Equipment
The CP300 has built-in speakers. You can also monitor the sound of the instrument by using external equipment. Connect a set of headphones, powered speakers, or other playback equipment as required.
There are several methods of connecting to external audio equipment, as described in the following illustrations. The following illustrations show various connection examples; use the one most similar to your intended setup.
Connecting Stereo Powered Speakers
For optimum, accurate reproduction of the instrument’s rich sounds, effects and full stereo image, use a pair of powered speakers. Connect the powered speakers to the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel.
Powered speaker (Left) Powered speaker (Right)
OUTPUT L/MONO jack OUTPUT R jack
Headphones
PHONES jack
CP300 n When using just one powered speaker, connect it to the OUTPUT L/MONO jack on the rear panel. n If you are connecting only to the L/MONO jack and want to use a Piano Voice, we recommend that you use the
Mono Piano 1 or Mono Piano 2 Voice for best results.
88
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices
Connecting to a Mixer
These are extra audio outputs in addition to the main OUTPUT L/R jacks.
The CP300 also features professional-use balanced XLR connectors for the OUTPUT L/R jacks. This type of connector is used in professional studio equipment and installations.
OUTPUT L
OUTPUT R
Amplifier
OUTPUT L jack OUTPUT R jack Mixer
Headphones
PHONES jack
CP300
Powered speaker
(Left)
Powered speaker
(Right) n • Connecting a pair of headphones does not affect audio output from the OUTPUT L/R and OUTPUT L/
MONO, R jacks. You can adjust the volume of the external audio equipment, built-in speakers or headphones with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.
• The sound monitored through the headphones is identical to the sound of the OUTPUT L/R and OUTPUT L/
MONO, R jacks.
About the OUTPUT L/R jacks
These XLR connectors carry a balanced signal output, and are intended for use in professional studios and installations. If the corresponding circuitry is designed properly, however, XLR-type connectors will also handle unbalanced signals with no problem. Microphone cables usually have this type of connector, as do the inputs and outputs of most professional audio gear.
Connecting to External Equipment
The CP300 also features a set of INPUT jacks. The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing you to play the sound of an external instrument through the CP300’s speakers.
Connect the outputs from the other instrument to the INPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel.
INPUT L/MONO jack INPUT R jack
OUTPUT L/MONO jack OUTPUT R jack
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
CP300 External MIDI synthesizer/tone generator
The sound of an instrument connected to these INPUT jacks cannot be adjusted from the CP300. Any level adjustments must be done from the instrument itself.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
89
Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices
Connecting to External MIDI Equipment
Using a standard MIDI cable (available separately), you can connect an external MIDI device, and control it from the CP300. Likewise, you can use an external MIDI device (such as a keyboard or sequencer) to control the sounds on the CP300. Below are several different MIDI connection examples; use the one most similar to your intended setup. n The CP300 cannot receive or transmit MIDI start (FAh), Continue (FBh), or Stop (FCh) messages.
Controlling from an External MIDI Keyboard
Use an external keyboard or synthesizer (such as the MOTIF ES) to remotely select and play the Voices of the
CP300.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
CP300 External MIDI synthesizer such as MOTIF ES n The CP300 can playback commercially available Song data or Song data created for other instruments or on a
computer. For details about MIDI data compatibility, refer to page 100.
n In order to have an external MIDI device control separate parts of the CP300’s internal tone generator, you’ll need
to change the “MIDI In Channel” parameter in the MIDI Setting menu. For details, refer to page 65.
MIDI Transmit Channel and Receive Channel
Make sure to match the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument with the MIDI
Receive Channel of the CP300. For details on setting the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the MIDI instrument.
When setting the MIDI Receive Channel of the CP300, confirm the MIDI Receive Channel for each part and change the settings of the desired parts, if necessary, to match the MIDI Transmit Channel
settings on the external MIDI instrument. (Refer to page 65.)
90
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices
Controlling an External MIDI Keyboard
This connection lets you play the sounds of an external MIDI tone generator (synthesizer, tone generator module, etc.) from the keyboard of the CP300. Use this connection to play the sounds of the connected
sounds.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
CP300 External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer, such as the S/SY/EX series
Splitting the Sound between the CP300 and an External Tone Generator by MIDI
Channel
Using the connection example shown above, you can play both instruments and have them separately sound different parts. To use this feature, you must set the CP300’s output channel and the external tone generator’s receive channel to the same channel number. Set the MIDI Transmit Channel via the “MIDI
Out Channel” parameter in the MIDI Settings menu while turning on the power (page 65). While the
Master mode is turned on, set the MIDI Transmit Channel via the “MIDI Out Channel” parameter in
the Master Edit menu (page 55).
Controlling Another MIDI Device via MIDI THRU
MIDI THRU simply re-transmits the MIDI messages received via MIDI IN. In the example below, the MIDI messages generated by playing an external keyboard are transmitted to an external tone generator via the MIDI
THRU connector on the CP300. The MIDI data of your performance on the CP300 are transmitted to an external device via the MIDI OUT connector on the CP300.
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI THRU MIDI IN
External MIDI tone generator
MIDI IN
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
External MIDI keyboard
CP300 External MIDI synthesizer
CP300 Owner’s Manual
91
Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices
Connecting to a Computer
Connecting this instrument to a computer via MIDI opens up a whole world of musical possibilities—such as using sequencer software to record and play back compositions with the CP300 sounds.
In order to use the instrument with a computer via a USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate USB-MIDI driver. You can download the proper driver from our website: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/download/usb_midi/
Compatible versions for: Windows XP Professional/Home Edition/Me/2000/98, and Mac OS X 10.2 – 10.4.0
*This information applies to version 2.1.6 (Windows) and version 1.0.4 (Mac OS X). For the latest information, check the web site above.
Using a USB Cable
MIDI messages can be transferred between the sequencer software and CP300 using the USB cable. However, audio data cannot be transmitted or received via USB on the CP300.
USB cable
USB connector
CP300 Computer with a USB interface
When the USB connector is connected, the MIDI connectors cannot be used.
Precautions when using the USB connector
When connecting the computer to the USB connector, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or even losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the computer.
CAUTION
• Before connecting the computer to the USB connector, exit from any power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer.
• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB connector.
• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the
USB connector.
- Quit any open applications (such as Voice Editor, Multi Part Editor, and sequencer software).
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)
• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
Selecting Voices from a Computer
You can select Voices on this instrument from your computer software by specifying the following MIDI messages.
• Bank Select MSB
• Bank Select LSB
• Program Change
For details on what values are assigned to the Voice Bank/Number of this synthesizer, refer to the
“Program Change List” on page 105.
92
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices
Using Local On/Off when connected to a computer
When connecting the CP300 to a computer, the keyboard performance data is generally sent to the computer, and then returned from the computer to play the tone generator block on the CP300. If the Local Control parameter in the MIDI Settings menu is set to “on,” a “double” sound may result, since the CP300 tone generator is receiving performance data from both the keyboard directly and the computer.
Use the setting suggestions below as a guideline; specific instructions may differ depending on your computer and the software used.
When MIDI Echo (MIDI Thru) is enabled on the software/computer:
Computer (SQ01, etc.)
CP300
USB connector
In Out
Out
Tone generator Keyboard
Local off
[MIDI SETTING] Local Control = Off
In
Echo back = on n When transmitting or receiving System Exclusive data (such as with the Bulk Dump function), use the setting example below, making sure that MIDI Echo on the computer software is set to “off.”
When MIDI Echo (MIDI Thru) is disabled on the software/computer:
Computer (SQ01, etc.)
USB connector
CP300 Out
In
Tone generator Keyboard
Local on
[MIDI SETTING] Local Control = On Echo back = on
* MIDI Echo is a function on sequencers that takes any data received via the MIDI IN and “echoes” it (or sends it as is) through the MIDI
OUT. In some software, this function is also called “MIDI Thru.” n For details about MIDI Echo, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular software.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
93
Message List
Appendix
Message List
The messages are listed in alphabetical order.
Message
BulkDataReceiving
Completed
BulkDataReceiving
Error
Description
Bulk data reception has been completed.
This is shown following the “Bulk Data Receiving Voice” message. This indicates that the instrument finished receiving bulk data, and that you can go on to the next step.
Bulk data reception has failed.
Check that the cable connection is secure and try again.
BulkDataReceiving
The instrument is receiving bulk data while this message is displayed.
Wait until the message closes, then go on to the next step.
BulkDump Error
Canceled
The instrument failed to transmit the bulk data.
If this message appears, make sure that the power of your computer has not been turned off, that the cable is connected correctly, and that the driver on your computer is functioning correctly. Then try transmitting the data once again.
This is shown when the operation has been canceled.
Completed
DataFmtErr
DuplicatedName
Execute?-->
Executing
The operation is completed.
This is shown following the “Executing” message. The instrument’s internal processing is complete. You can go on to the next step.
The file format is invalid.
This message appears when the Performance file selected via “Load From Mem.” (page 79)
is invalid and cannot be called up.
The Song name or Performance name is duplicated.
You tried to save a Song file after changing its name using the “Rename Song” (page 83), or
a Performance file after changing its name using the “Rename File” (page 80) parameter,
but a Song or Performance with the same name already exists in memory. The instrument returns to the previous display after three seconds. Rename the Song correctly.
Do you wish to execute the operation?
This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the B [– (NO)] or [EXIT] button to cancel.
The instrument is processing the data internally.
Wait until the message closes, then proceed to the next step.
FactorySet Completed
MemoryFileExcluded
FactorySet Completed
MemoryFileIncluded
The factory default settings, excepting files stored to storage memory (refer to
“Factory Set” on page 71), have been restored.
This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to
The factory default settings, including files stored to storage memory (refer to
“Factory Set” on page 71), have been restored.
This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and Bb6 keys and turn on the
power to the instrument (page 17).
94
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Message List
Message
FlashMemoryLifeTime
Exit-->
HostError
LastPowerOffIllegal
MemoryFileChecking
LastPowerOffIllegal
MemoryFileErrorRecovered
LastPowerOffIllegal
MemoryFileErased
MemoryError
MemoryError
MemoryFull
NoSong
NoFileToDelete
Description
The instrument’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired.
Consult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the instrument will not be able to back up the Songs, Performance files and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display.
There is a problem with the USB connector.
The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI application on the computer is working incorrectly. In this situation, turn the power off to both the instrument and the computer, and check the cable connection. Then, turn on the power to the computer and the instrument in this order and check to see if the driver and
MIDI application on the computer work properly.
This message is also shown if the USB cable is connected to the instrument without being connected to your computer. When you wish to use the instrument alone, turn off the power of the instrument, disconnect the USB cable from the instrument, then turn the power on again. If the cable is left connected in this condition, the instrument may not function properly.
The power was incorrectly turned off the previous time. The instrument is checking the internal memory.
You turned off the power to the instrument while it was writing data to storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power. The internal memory is being checked while this message is displayed. If it has been confirmed that any files in the storage memory are corrupted, all the files will be deleted.
Some files in the storage memory have been restored.
This message appears following the message “Last Power Off Illegal / Memory File
Checking,” indicating that the instrument recovered as much data in the storage memory as possible.
Files on the storage memory have been deleted.
This message appears following the message “Last Power Off Illegal / Memory File
Checking,” indicating that the instrument could not recover data in the storage memory and that all memory files were deleted.
A memory problem has occurred.
While a Song or a Performance file was being loaded, the instrument detected defects in memory. Reset the instrument to its normal (factory default) settings with “Memory File
Included” (page 71) after you back up all Song data.
There may be a memory problem.
1. This message indicates that there may be a problem with the memory when selecting a
Song or Performance file. If the message appears repeatedly when you continue using the instrument, back up the Song data, then restore the default setting by using “Memory
File Included” in “Factory Set” (page 71).
2. This message will appear if a different “Character Code” (page 84) is selected than was
when you assigned the Performance file name. In this case, switch the “Character
Code,” re-select the Performance file.
There is no more available space in storage memory.
There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more Songs or
Performance files. Delete some Songs or Performance files in the storage memory (pages
80, 83), then save the new data to memory.
There is no Song to be saved.
This message will appear if there is no Song for the “Save To Memory” (page 82) operation
to save. In this case, no Song will be saved.
There is no file to be deleted.
You tried to delete a file that does not exist in the storage memory. You cannot delete the file.
NoSongToDelete
There is no Song to be deleted.
You tried to delete a Song that does not exist in the storage memory. The Song cannot be deleted.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
95
Message List
Message
OverWrite?
PleaseWait
ProtectedFile
ProtectedSong
Set?-->
SongChanged Save?
SongError
SongError
SongTooBig
SongTooBig
Start?-->
Sure?-->
Transmitting
Transmitting
Completed
Description
Do you want to overwrite the data?
This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.
Please wait.
You tried to start playing a Song or perform another operation right after selecting the Song.
Wait until the message closes.
This is a protected file.
You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected files (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such files.
This is a protected Song.
This message appears when you try to change the name of an internally-protected Song
(Preset Song). You cannot change the name of such Songs.
Is the setting maintained?
This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings or not.
Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel.
The Song has been changed. Do you wish to save the Song?
You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded Song to storage memory.
If you continue the operation, the recorded Song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The “Save
To Memory” (page 82) parameter is shown in the display. Save the Song then try the
operation again.
An error has been found in the Song data.
1. The instrument has found some defects in the selected (or playing) Song. Select the
Song and play it again. If you still see this message, the Song data may be damaged.
2. This message will appear if a different “Character Code” (page 84) is selected than was
when you assigned the Song name. In this case, switch the “Character Code,” re-select the Song, and play it back.
The Song data is too large.
1. The Current memory space has become full during recording. Recording stops automatically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears when you try to enter recording mode to perform additional recording but the Song data has already filled the current memory. In this case, you cannot perform additional
recording. Use the “Channel Clear” parameter (page 86) to delete unnecessary tracks (if
any) to make more room in memory.
2. The size of the selected Song is larger than the current memory. The instrument cannot load/play the selected Song. Select another Song.
3. This message is shown when you edit a Song if that Song is larger than the capacity of the current memory. This Song cannot be edited on the instrument.
Do you wish to start the operation?
This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button.
Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.
Are you sure?
This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.
MIDI bulk data is being transmitted.
This message appears when the instrument receives a bulk request from a computer. This message appears while the bulk data is being transmitted. Wait until the message closes, then go on to the next step. Please wait.
Bulk data transmission has been completed.
This is shown following the “Transmitting” message. It is displayed when the transmission of the bulk data has been completed. You can go on to the next step.
96
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Message List
Message
Transmitting
Error
WrongName
Description
MIDI Bulk data is being transmitted.
This message appears when the instrument receives a bulk request from a computer. The instrument has failed to transmit Voice bulk data.
Check the cable connection and repeat the procedure from the beginning.
The Song name or Performance file name is not appropriate.
1. This message appears when you have used a period or space at the beginning of a
Song name/Performance file (while handling a Song/Performance file), or you have tried to change a Song name by including a character (or characters) not supported by the instrument. The instrument returns to previous display after three seconds. Make sure to enter a valid name.
2. This message will appear if a different “Character Code” (page 84) is selected than was
when you assigned the Song name or Performance file name. In this case, switch the
“Character Code,” re-select the Song or Performance file.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
97
Troubleshooting
The power of the instrument does not turn on.
Problem
A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off.
Noise is heard from the instrument's speakers.
The overall volume is too low, or there is no sound at all.
The keyboard volume is low.
The Song playback volume is low.
The speakers do not switch off when a pair of headphones is connected.
The pitch and/or tone of the Piano
Voices in certain ranges do not sound right.
The instrument has not been plugged in properly.
Possible causes Solution
Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the instrument, and the male plug
into a proper AC outlet (page 11).
This is normal.
This is normal when electrical current is being applied to the instrument.
The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument.
Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the instrument. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference.
Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level.
The [MASTER VOLUME] (page 13) may be
set too low.
The [ZONE CONTROL] (page 28) may be
set too low.
Raise the [ZONE CONTROL] slider.
Speaker setting may be off.
Turn on the [SPEAKER] button (page 52).
“Local Control” (page 65) may be set to off.
Set “Local Control” to on.
“Internal TG” (page 55) may be set to off.
The pedal or the Modulation wheel is set to minimum, when “Expression” is assigned to the foot controller or Modulation wheel.
“Expression” may have been assigned to one of the connected footswitches.
The gain setting of the Master EQ (page 36)
may be low.
Set “Internal TG” to on.
Change the position of the pedal or
Modulation wheel.
Assign any function other than “Expression” to the footswitch.
Raise the gain of the Master EQ.
The gain of the Part EQ (page 36) may be
low.
“Volume” may have been assigned to the
[ZONE CONTROL] slider while the Master mode is turned on, the [ZONE CONTROL] may be set too low.
The volume level for the keyboard
Performance may be set too low.
The volume of the Song playback may be set too low.
Speaker setting may be On.
Raise the gain of the Part EQ.
Raise the [ZONE CONTROL] slider.
Raise any of the [ZONE CONTROL] slider.
Raise the [SONG VOLUME] slider.
Set the Speaker setting to Off.
Mechanical noise is heard during
Performance.
The buttons do not respond.
The Piano Voices attempt to precisely simulate actual piano sounds. However, as a result of sampling algorithms, overtones in some ranges may sound exaggerated, producing a somewhat different pitch or tone.
The keyboard mechanism of this instrument simulates the keyboard mechanism of an actual piano. Mechanical noise is also heard on a piano.
While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled.
The Panel Lock function is effective.
This is normal.
This is normal.
If a Song is playing or recording, stop playback or recording. Otherwise, press the
[EXIT] button to return to the main display, and then perform the desired operation.
Rapidly press the [PANEL LOCK] button twice to cancel the Panel Lock.
98
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Problem
The sound sustains and does not decay while pressing the pedal to which the sostenuto function is assigned.
Higher or lower notes do not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made.
The tempo does not change even though the Song was recorded with tempo changes.
Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded, and one or more tracks have been unexpectedly deleted.
Possible causes
For Voices in the ORGAN, STRINGS,
CHOIR, PAD, and XG groups, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal.
The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C-2 – G8. (With the normal setting, the 88 keys of this instrument cover the range of A-1 – C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C-2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower.
Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the tempo change may not have been recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording track is selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The same method applies to editing the tempo after recording.
For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording track for the Layer part Voice or the Left part Voice is automatically assigned
(page 48). Therefore, if the track already has
data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, the actual process of switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the Song is not recorded.
Therefore, the notes you played with the
Layer part Voice or the Left part Voice are not recorded.
The time signature cannot be changed in the middle of the measure.
This is normal.
This is normal.
This is normal. Check the location of the tempo change.
This is normal.
Solution
Cannot change the time signature in the Song after recording.
The Song title is not correct.
The “Character Code” setting may be different than that used when you named the
Song.
The Performance title is not correct.
The “Character Code” parameter setting
(page 84) has been changed from the one
set when naming the Performance file.
Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the Song, use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to locate the measure in which you wish to change the time signature, and then change it.
Use the “Character Code” parameter
(page 84) in the [SONG FILE] button to
change the setting.
Make sure that the “Character Code” parameter is set to the same one as set when the Performance file was named.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
99
MIDI Data Compatibility
The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below.
Voice allocation format
With MIDI, Voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard
(order of Voice allocation) is referred to as the “Voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the Voice allocation format of the Song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback.
GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM
System Level 1. Most commercially available music data is created as Format 0 “GM System Level 1.”
XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Song data recorded on the instrument using Voices in the XG category is XG-compatible.
100
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Factory Setting List
Voice settings [VOICE EDIT]
All the Voice settings differ depending on the current Voice.
MIDI settings [MIDI SETTING]
Parameter name
MidiOutChannel
MidiInChannel
LocalControl
MidiOutSelect
ReceiveParameter
TransmitParameter
IntialSetup
BulkDump
Settings
Setting the MIDI transmit channel
Setting the MIDI receive channel
Turning local control on/off
Selecting performance from the keyboard or Song data for
MIDI transmission
Selecting the types of data received via MIDI
Selecting the types of data transmitted via MIDI
Transmitting the initial settings on the panel
Executing Voice data bulk dump
Value
Main: Ch 1
Left: Ch 2
Layer: Ch 3
Left Layer: Ch 4
Ch 1 – 16: Song
Ch 17: Keyboard
Ch 18: Main
Ch 19: Left
Ch 20: Layer
Ch 21: Left Layer
Ch 22 – 32: Off
On
Keyboard
All data: On
All data: On
—
Current
Page
Other settings [OTHER SETTING]
Parameter name
TouchResponse
Tune
PianoTuningCurve
Scale
SplitPoint
SplitPoint2
Transpose
SoftPedalDepth
StringResonanceDepth
SustainSamplingDepth
KeyOffSamplingDepth
VibraphonePedalMode
PedalPlay/Pause
PedalType
Selecting the touch response
Fine tuning the pitch
Selecting a tuning curve for a Piano Voice
Selecting a scale
Specifying the Split Point (Main)
Specifying the Split Point 2 (Layer)
Changing the key
Settings
Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal
Setting the depth of String Resonance
Setting the depth of Sustain Sampling for the Sustain pedal
Specifying the volume of the Key-off sound
Selecting a pedal function for Vibraphone Voice
Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal
Selecting a pedal type
Value
Medium
A3 = 440.0 Hz
Stretch
Equal
F#2
F#2
Keyboard = 0
Song = 0
5
5
5
5
PianoLike
All pedals: Off
Pedal 1, Pedal 2, Pedal
3: Make; Pedal 4: Break
Page
CP300 Owner’s Manual
101
Factory Setting List
Parameter name
HalfPedalPoint
PitchBendRange
EqualizerLock
MemoryBackUp
Settings
Setting the point at which the sustain pedal starts to affect the sound
Setting the Pitch Bend range
Locking the Master Equalizer settings
Selecting items saved at shutdown
0
Restoring the default settings
Value
2
On
Transpose,
Main/Left Layer,
OtherSetting: Off,
Others: On
MemoryFileExcluded
Page
FactorySet
Master settings [MASTER EDIT]
Slider
Parameter name
SendBankMsb
SendBankLsb
SendPG#
Octave
InterITG
MidiOutChannel
Settings
Assigning a function to the [ZONE CONTROL] slider
Setting the MSB of the Send Bank Select message
Setting the LSB of the Send Bank Select message
Setting the Program Change message
Setting the octave of the external tone generator
Turning the internal tone generator on/off
Setting the MIDI transmit channel when the Master mode is turned on
0
0
VOLUME
Value
1
0
On
Zone 1: Ch 1,
Zone 2: Ch 2,
Zone 3: Ch 3,
Zone 4: Ch 4
Page
Settings for Song recording and playback [SONG SETTING]
Parameter name
Quantize
SwingRate
QuickPlay
ChannelListen
ChannelClear
FromToRepeat
SongRepeat
TimeSignature
ClickVolume
ClickType
Correcting note timing.
Settings
Determining how strongly the notes will be quantized.
Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing
Auditioning the channels
Deleting data from each channel
Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly
Playing back a Song/all Songs repeatedly
Setting the Click time signature
Setting the Click volume level
Setting the Click bell sound
Off
50%
On
Value
Ch 1
Ch 1
RepeatOff
PresetSongs
4/4
100
BellOff
Page
102
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Voice group Voice name
GrandPiano1 Grand Piano 1
GrandPiano2 Grand Piano 2
Mono Piano Mono Piano 1
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
E.Piano3
Mellow Piano 1
Rock Piano
HonkyTonk Piano
Mellow Piano 2
Mono Piano 2
Comp. Piano 1
Comp. Piano 2
Chorus E.Piano
Phaser E.Piano
AutoPan E.Piano
Standard E.Piano
DX E.Piano 1
DX E.Piano 2
Synth Piano
Tremolo Vintage
E.P.
Vintage E.Piano
Amp.Sim. Vintage
E.P.
Stereo sampling
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
Touch
Sense
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Dynamic sampling
Key-off samples
Ø Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
–
Ø
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
String resonance
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Voice description
This sound was sampled from a full concert grand piano. Three stages of dynamics were sampled, and no effort has been spared in making the sound virtually identical to that of an acoustic piano. Even the tonal changes produced by the damper pedal and the subtle sounds of releasing a key are reproduced. The sympathetic vibration (string resonance) that occurs between the strings of an acoustic piano has also been simulated. Suitable not only for classical compositions but also for piano pieces of any style.
A warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for classical music.
A bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles.
A honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal character that is quite different than a grand piano.
A spacious and clear piano sound with a bright resonance. Ideal for popular music.
A mellow piano sound with a different character than Mellow Piano 1.
The sound of a mono piano. Good for ensemble performance.
A mono piano sound with a different character than Mono Piano 1.
A mono piano sound with compression effect.
A mono piano sound with a different character than Comp. Piano 1.
The sound of an electric piano that generates sound by striking metal tines with a hammer.
Softly played notes will have a mellow character, and strongly played notes will sound more forceful. A chorus effect is applied to create warmth.
A distinctive phaser effect makes this ideal for fusion styles.
An electric piano with a characteristic panning effect.
A straightforward electric piano sound with reverb as the only effect.
The sound of an electronic piano as simulated by an FM synthesizer such as the DX7.
Differences in playing dynamics will affect the tone. Ideal for popular songs.
An FM synthesizer electronic piano sound using a different algorithm than DX E.Piano 1, with a bright sounding character.
–
–
–
–
This Voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound.
The sound of an electric piano of a different type than E.Piano 1, often used in rock and popular music.
An electric piano sound with a vintage character, and reverb as the only effect.
The sound of an electric piano distorted by an amp simulator effect. Ideal for rock music.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
103
Voice List
Voice group
Clavi.
Vibraphone
Organ1
Organ2
Voice name
Wah Clavi.
Clavi. 2
Vibraphone
Theater Organ
Rock Organ
Draw Organ
Pipe Organ
Principal
Harpsichord Harpsichord 8
Strings
Choir/Pad.
Phaser Clavi.
Clavi. 1
Marimba
Celesta
Jazz Organ
Pipe Organ Tutti
Pipe Organ Flute
Harpsichord 8'+4
Strings
Synth Strings
Slow Strings
Choir
Slow Choir
Scat
Synth Pad 1
Stereo sampling
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
Touch
Sense
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Dynamic sampling
Key-off samples
– Ø
–
–
–
Ø
–
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
String resonance
–
Voice description
This is the Voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in contemporary soul and R&B music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys.
– A struck-string keyboard instrument with electromagnetic pickups. A straightforward sound with only reverb applied.
Includes a distinctive wah effect.
–
–
–
A different type of Clavi. 1 sound.
Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets.
The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play.
– A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for spaciousness and realism.
–
–
The sound of a celesta—a percussion instrument in which hammers strike metallic bars to produce sound.
The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ.
Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.
A bright electric organ sound.
–
– An aggressive electric organ sound, ideal for rock.
–
–
A standard electric organ sound.
This Voice features the combination of pipes
(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
This Voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccata and Fugue in D Minor by Bach.
A pipe organ sound that combines flute-type
(woodwind type) stops of different pitches
(8'+4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for accompanying hymns.
The sound of the instrument frequently used in baroque music. Variations in playing touch will not affect the volume, and a characteristic sound will be heard when you release the key.
A harpsichord with an added upper octave.
Produces a more brilliant sound.
Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this Voice with piano in the Dual mode.
A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble.
The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with
GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO.
– A big, spacious choir Voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces.
–
–
–
The sound of a choir with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or
E.PIANO.
You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this Voice.
Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced.
A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound.
Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble.
104
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Voice group Voice name
Choir/Pad.
Synth Pad 2
Guitar
Bass
Nylon Guitar
Steel Guitar
Wood Bass
Bass&Cymbal
Electric Bass
Fretless Bass
Stereo sampling
–
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
Touch
Sense
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Dynamic sampling
Key-off samples
– –
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
String resonance
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Voice description
A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble.
A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound.
Enjoy the atmosphere it adds to a quiet song.
A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular music.
The sound of a finger-plucked upright bass.
Frequently used in jazz and Latin music.
The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto the bass. Effective when used for jazz walkingbass lines.
The sound of an electric bass. Frequently used in jazz, rock, and popular music.
The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for styles such as jazz and fusion.
Program Change List
Voice group
GrandPiano1
GrandPiano2
Mono Piano
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
E.Piano3
Clavi.
Vibraphone
Voice name
Grand Piano 1
Mellow Piano 1
Rock Piano
HonkyTonk Piano
Grand Piano 2
Mellow Piano 2
Mono Piano 1
Mono Piano 2
Comp. Piano 1
Comp. Piano 2
Chorus E.Piano
Phaser E.Piano
AutoPan E.Piano
Standard E.Piano
DX E.Piano 1
DX E.Piano 2
Synth Piano
Tremolo Vintage E.P.
Vintage E.Piano
Amp.Sim.Vintage E.P.
Phaser Clavi.
Clavi. 1
Wah Clavi.
Clavi. 2
Vibraphone
Marimba
Celesta
Bank
MSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bank
LSB
122
123
121
120
124
122
123
125
122
122
122
124
116
122
124
125
126
122
123
122
123
122
122
112
114
123
114
P.C.#
8
8
8
8
89
5
5
5
12
13
9
6
6
5
5
5
5
2
2
2
2
1
1
3
4
1
1
XG
Voice group
Organ1
Organ2
Harpsichord
Strings
Choir/Pad.
Guitar
Bass
Voice name
Jazz Organ
Theater Organ
Rock Organ
Draw Organ
Pipe Organ Principal
Pipe Organ Tutti
Pipe Organ Flute
Harpsichord 8'
Harpsichord 8'+4'
Strings
Synth Strings
Slow Strings
Choir
Slow Choir
Scat
Synth Pad 1
Synth Pad 2
Nylon Guitar
Steel Guitar
Wood Bass
Bass&Cymbal
Electric Bass
Fretless Bass
480 Voices
Bank
LSB
123
122
122
122
122
123
122
122
122
124
122
125
123
122
124
122
122
122
122
122
124
122
122
–
P.C.#
53
53
54
90
7
49
51
50
20
20
20
7
17
17
19
17
33
34
36
–
92
25
26
33
Bank
MSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
P.C.# = Program Change number (1-128)
When you specify a program change as a number in the range of 0-127, specify a number that is one less than the program number listed below. For example, to specify program number 128, you would actually enter program change 127.
For details about XG Voices, refer to the XG Voice List (page 108).
CP300 Owner’s Manual
105
Preset Performance List
Number Performance name
A01 Piano+Pad
A02 Piano+E.Piano
Type
Dual
Dual
A03 Piano+DX E.P.1
Dual
A04 Piano+DX E.P.2
A05 Piano+SoftStr
A06 HonkyTonkPiano
A07 E.Piano+Pad
Dual
Dual
Dual
Dual
A08 E.Piano+DX E.P.
A09 E.Piano+SlowStr
Dual
Dual
A10 E.Piano+
Vintage E.P.
A11 DX E.P.+SoftStr
Dual
Dual
A12 DX E.P.+
SynthPiano
A13 PipeOrgan+Choir
Dual
Dual
A14 Strings+Choir
A15 Orchestral Harp
A16 PolySynthPad
Dual
Dual
Dual
B01 WoodBass/
GrandPiano
B02 WoodBass/
NylonGuitar
B03 WoodBass/
VibraPhone
B04 Bass+Cym/
JazzOrgan
Split
B05 E.Bass/PhaserE.P.
Split
Split
Split
Split
B06 Bass+Cym/Scat Split
GrandPiano2 DX E.Piano2
GrandPiano2 S.SlwStr
GrandPiano1 GrandPiano1
AutoPanE.P.
SynthPad1
StandardE.P
DX E.Piano1
ChorusE.P.
SlowStrings
StandardE.P
VintageE.P.
DX E.Piano2
S.SlwStr
DX E.Paino2
SynthPiano
PipeOrganTu Choir
Strings Choir
NylnHarp
PolySyPd
Harp
NewAgePd
Nylon Guitar
Vibraphone
JazzOrgan
Scat
Main
GrandPiano1
Phaser E.Piano
Layer
Voices used
GrandPiano1 WarmPad
GrandPiano1 ChorusE.P.
GrandPiano1 DX E.Piano1
Left
Wood Bass
Wood Bass
Wood Bass
Bass & Cymbal
Electric Bass
Bass & Cymbal
Performance discription
Left Layer
Grand piano layered with a warm-sounding pad. Usable in a variety of situations from rapid passages to ballads.
Widely-used layered sound with piano and electric piano. Ideal for 80’s pop.
Widely-used layered sound with piano and DX electric piano.
Enjoy harmonies with the sparkling electric piano.
Another type of layered piano and DX electric piano.
Piano layered with soft strings.
Honky-tonk piano that simulates slight detuning.
Auto-panned electric piano layered with a soft pad.
Beautifully spacious stereo spread.
Layered electric piano and DX electric piano.
Chorused electric piano layered with slow attack strings.
Standard electric piano layered with vintagetype electric piano.
DX electric piano layered with soft strings.
DX electric piano layered with synth piano.
Magnificent layered sound with pipe organ and chorus.
Classical layered sound with strings and chorus.
Beautiful layered sound of two harps, slightly delayed.
Dense and rich motion pad.
Key-on modifies the sound.
Standard wood bass split with piano. Ideal for playing jazz by yourself.
Nylon-string guitar split with wood bass.
Standard wood bass split with vibraphone.
Play rhythm with bass and cymbal in the left hand, and solo organ in the right hand.
Electric piano with phaser
(typical of 70’s fusion), split with electric bass.
Play scat in the right hand, and bass and cymbal in the left.
Scat sounds are velocityswitched.
106
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Preset Performance List
Number Performance name Type
B07 Organ Upper/Lower Dual+Split JazzOrgan
B08 E.Piano/GrandPiano Split
B09 JazzOrg/GrandPiano Split
Main
GrandPiano1
GrandPiano1
B10 SynBass/SynBrass Dual+Split SynBrss1
B11 Delay E.Piano
B12 Room Piano
B13 Old piano
Single
Single
Single
Standard
E.Piano
GrandPiano1
GrandPiano2
B14 Baroque Ensemble Dual+Split Hc8'+4'
B15 AOR Split
B16 Drum Kit
Dual+Split GrandPiano2 SynthPad1 E.Bass
Drm StandardKit1
Layer
SoloSine
Voices used
Left
Jazz Organ
Phaser E.Piano
Jazz Organ
SynBrss1 SynBass1Dark
PipeOrganP Strings
Performance discription
Left Layer
Choir
MuteGtr
Simulates a dual-manual organ.
Play chords in the left hand, and solo with the right.
Play chords in the left hand on an electric piano with phaser applied, and piano solo in the right.
Play organ backing in the left hand, and piano solo in the right.
Play synth bass in the left hand, and bright synth brass in the right.
Electric piano with delay applied to create a sense of space.
Piano that sounds as if heard at a distance in a spacious room.
Simulation of a piano sound heard on an old record. Distorts slightly as you play harder.
Play strings and chorus in the left hand, and harpsichord and pipe organ in the right.
Rich sound that lets you play muted guitar and bass in the left hand, and piano and pad in the right.
The CP300 provides highquality drum sounds as well as piano sounds. Try out your drumming skills!
The 32 Performances in variations C, D use the Grand Piano 1 Voice.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
107
XG Voice List
Bank Select MSB=00
: Same as Bank 0
E
KSP
Bank 1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2 GrndPnoK
2 BritPnoK
2 ElGrPnoK
2 HnkyTnkK
2 El.Pno1K
2 El.Pno2K
1 Harpsi.K
1
2
2 Clavi K
1
1
1
1 Vibes K
1 MarimbaK
E
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Stereo
Bank 3
S.Strngs
S.SlwStr
S.Choir
: No sound E: Element number
Instrument
Group
Piano
Chromatic
Percussion
Organ
Guitar
Bass
Strings
Ensemble
Brass
Reed
Pipe
Synth Lead
Synth Pad
Synth Effects
Ethnic
Percussive
Sound Effects
Pgm#
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
Muted Trumpet
French Horn
Brass Section 1
Synth Brass 1
Synth Brass 2
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
Tenor Sax
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
Baritone Sax
Oboe
English Horn
Bassoon
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
Pan Flute
Blown Bottle
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
Lead 1 (square)
Lead 2 (sawtooth)
Lead 3 (calliope)
92
93
94
95
88
89
90
91
Lead 4 (chiff)
Lead 5 (charang)
Lead 6 (voice)
Lead 7 (fifths)
Lead 8 (bass+lead)
Pad 1 (new age)
Pad 2 (warm)
Pad 3 (polysynth)
96
97
98
99
Pad 4 (choir)
Pad 5 (bowed)
Pad 6 (metallic)
Pad 7 (halo)
Pad 8 (sweep)
FX 1 (rain)
FX 2 (soundtrack)
FX 3 (crystal)
100 FX 4 (atmosphere)
101 FX 5 (brightness)
102 FX 6 (goblins)
103 FX 7 (echoes)
Bank 0
Bank Select LSB=00
Acoustic Grand Piano
Bright Acoustic Piano
Electric Grand Piano
Honky-tonk Piano
Electric Piano 1
Electric Piano 2
Harpsichord
Clavi
Celesta
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Vibraphone
Marimba
Xylophone
Tubular Bells
Dulcimer
Drawbar Organ 1
Percussive Organ
Rock Organ
Church Organ 1
Reed Organ
Accordion
Hamonica
Tango Accordion
Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1
Acoustic Guitar (steel)
Electric Guitar (jazz)
Electric Guitar (clean)
Electric Guitar (muted)
Overdriven Guitar
Distortion Guitar
Guitar Harmonics
Acoustic Bass
Electric Bass (finger)
Electric Bass (pick)
Fretless Bass
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Tremolo Strings
Pizzicato Strings
Orchestral Harp
Timpani
String Ensemble 1
String Ensemble 2
Synth Strings 1
Synth Strings 2
Choir Aahs
Voice Oohs
Synth Voice
Bank 0
GrandPno
BritePno
El.Grand
HnkyTonk
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
Harpsi.
Clavi.
Celesta
Glocken
MusicBox
Vibes
Marimba
Xylophon
TubulBel
Dulcimer
DrawOrgn
PercOrgn
RockOrgn
ChrchOrg
ReedOrgn
Acordion
Harmnica
TangoAcd
NylonGtr
SteelGtr
Jazz Gtr
CleanGtr
Mute.Gtr
Ovrdrive
Dist.Gtr
GtrHarmo
Aco.Bass
FngrBass
PickBass
Fretless
SlapBas1
SlapBas2
SynBass1
SynBass2
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabs
Trem.Str
Pizz.Str
Harp
Timpani
Strings1
Strings2
Syn.Str1
Syn.Str2
ChoirAah
VoiceOoh
SynVoice
Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit
Trumpet Trumpet
Trombone
Tuba
Trombone
Tuba
Mute.Trp
Fr. Horn
BrasSect
SynBrss1
SynBrss2
SprnoSax
Alto Sax
TenorSax
Bari.Sax
Oboe
Eng.Horn
Bassoon
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
PanFlute
Bottle
Shakhchi
Whistle
Ocarina
SquareLd
Saw Ld
CaliopLd
Chiff Ld
CharanLd
Voice Ld
Fifth Ld
Bass&Ld
NewAgePd
Warm Pad
PolySyPd
ChoirPad
BowedPad
MetalPad
Halo Pad
SweepPad
Rain
SoundTrk
Crystal
Atmosphr
Bright
Goblins
Echoes
104 FX 8 (sci-fi)
105 Sitar
106 Banjo
107 Shamisen
108 Koto
109 Kalimba
110 Bagpipe
111 Fiddle
Sci-Fi
Sitar
Banjo
Shamisen
Koto
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
112 Shanai
113 Tinkle Bell
114 Agogo
115 Steel Drums
116 Woodblock
117 Taiko Drum
118 Melodic Tom 1
119 Synth Drum
120 Reverse Cymbal
121 Guitar Fret Noise
122 Breath Noise
123 Seashore
124 Bird Tweet
125 Telephone Ring
126 Helicopter
127 Applause
128 Gunshot
Shanai
TnklBell
Agogo
SteelDrm
Woodblok
TaikoDrm
MelodTom
Syn Drum
RevCymbl
FretNoiz
BrthNoiz
Seashore
Tweet
Telphone
Helicptr
Applause
Gunshot
E
2
2
2
Single
Bank 6 E
MelloSBa
FrHrSolo
SquarLd2
Saw Ld 2
1
Slow Vln
1
Slow
Bank 8 E
Fast Decay
Bank 12 E
Double Attack
Bank 14 E
Bright
Bank 16 E Bank 17 E
Dark
Bank 18
MelloGrP
E
2
Bank 19 E
Resonant
Bank 20 E
Attack
Bank 24 E
SlwTrStr
Slow Str
LegatoSt
1 LMSquare
1 ThickSaw
Echoes 2
1
2
2
1
2
1
Seq Bass
2
Quack Br
SynDrCmp
2
2
2 Popcorn
Echo Pan
2
2
NylonGt2
SteelGt2
Ch.Aahs2
Trumpet2
Tuba 2
1
1
2
1 BriteTrp
1
Big&Low 2
ThickPad 2 Soft Pad
MelloEP1
MelloGtr
FingrDrk
SynBa1Dk
ClkSynBa
2
Trmbone2
Soft Brs
Hollow
Dyna Saw
2 Sine Pad
TinyBell
WarmAtms
2
1
2
1
2 SynBa2Dk
2
2
1 Shroud
1 Digi Saw
2
2
2 HollwRls
1
FastResB
2
2 Big Lead
2
RezSynBr
Shwimmer 2
70sPcOr1
1 AcidBass
Arco Str
2 PolyBrss
2 HeavySyn
SynthAah
2
1
2
2
2
2
108
CP300 Owner’s Manual
XG Voice List
Instrument
Group
Piano
Chromatic
Percussion
Organ
Guitar
Bass
Strings
Ensemble
Brass
Reed
Pipe
Synth Lead
Synth Pad
Synth Effects
Ethnic
Percussive
Sound Effects
Pgm#
Bank 0
Bank Select LSB=00
Bank 0
97
98
FX 1 (rain)
FX 2 (soundtrack)
99 FX 3 (crystal)
100 FX 4 (atmosphere)
101 FX 5 (brightness)
102 FX 6 (goblins)
103 FX 7 (echoes)
104 FX 8 (sci-fi)
105 Sitar
106 Banjo
107 Shamisen
108 Koto
109 Kalimba
110 Bagpipe
111 Fiddle
112 Shanai
113 Tinkle Bell
114 Agogo
115 Steel Drums
116 Woodblock
117 Taiko Drum
118 Melodic Tom 1
119 Synth Drum
120 Reverse Cymbal
121 Guitar Fret Noise
122 Breath Noise
123 Seashore
124 Bird Tweet
125 Telephone Ring
126 Helicopter
127 Applause
128 Gunshot
93
94
95
96
89
90
91
92
85
86
87
88
81
82
83
84
77
78
79
80
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
65
66
67
68
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
Tenor Sax
Baritone Sax
Oboe
English Horn
Bassoon
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
Pan Flute
Blown Bottle
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
Lead 1 (square)
Lead 2 (sawtooth)
Lead 3 (calliope)
Lead 4 (chiff)
Lead 5 (charang)
Lead 6 (voice)
Lead 7 (fifths)
Lead 8 (bass+lead)
Pad 1 (new age)
Pad 2 (warm)
Pad 3 (polysynth)
Pad 4 (choir)
Pad 5 (bowed)
Pad 6 (metallic)
Pad 7 (halo)
Pad 8 (sweep)
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
44
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Acoustic Grand Piano
Bright Acoustic Piano
Electric Grand Piano
Honky-tonk Piano
Electric Piano 1
Electric Piano 2
Harpsichord
Clavi
Celesta
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Vibraphone
Marimba
Xylophone
Tubular Bells
Dulcimer
Drawbar Organ 1
Percussive Organ
Rock Organ
Church Organ 1
Reed Organ
Accordion
Hamonica
Tango Accordion
Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1
Acoustic Guitar (steel)
Electric Guitar (jazz)
Electric Guitar (clean)
Electric Guitar (muted)
Overdriven Guitar
Distortion Guitar
Guitar Harmonics
Acoustic Bass
Electric Bass (finger)
Electric Bass (pick)
Fretless Bass
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Tremolo Strings
Pizzicato Strings
Orchestral Harp
Timpani
String Ensemble 1
String Ensemble 2
Synth Strings 1
Synth Strings 2
Choir Aahs
Voice Oohs
Synth Voice
Orchestra Hit
Strings1
Strings2
Syn.Str1
Syn.Str2
ChoirAah
VoiceOoh
SynVoice
Orch.Hit
Trumpet Trumpet
Trombone Trombone
Tuba
Muted Trumpet
Tuba
Mute.Trp
French Horn
Brass Section 1
Synth Brass 1
Synth Brass 2
Fr. Horn
BrasSect
SynBrss1
SynBrss2
Aco.Bass
FngrBass
PickBass
Fretless
SlapBas1
SlapBas2
SynBass1
SynBass2
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabs
Trem.Str
Pizz.Str
Harp
Timpani
DrawOrgn
PercOrgn
RockOrgn
ChrchOrg
ReedOrgn
Acordion
Harmnica
TangoAcd
NylonGtr
SteelGtr
Jazz Gtr
CleanGtr
Mute.Gtr
Ovrdrive
Dist.Gtr
GtrHarmo
GrandPno
BritePno
El.Grand
HnkyTonk
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
Harpsi.
Clavi.
Celesta
Glocken
MusicBox
Vibes
Marimba
Xylophon
TubulBel
Dulcimer
TnklBell
Agogo
SteelDrm
Woodblok
TaikoDrm
MelodTom
Syn Drum
RevCymbl
FretNoiz
BrthNoiz
Seashore
Tweet
Telphone
Helicptr
Applause
Gunshot
Rain
SoundTrk
Crystal
Atmosphr
Bright
Goblins
Echoes
Sci-Fi
Sitar
Banjo
Shamisen
Koto
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
Shanai
SquareLd
Saw Ld
CaliopLd
Chiff Ld
CharanLd
Voice Ld
Fifth Ld
Bass&Ld
NewAgePd
Warm Pad
PolySyPd
ChoirPad
BowedPad
MetalPad
Halo Pad
SweepPad
SprnoSax
Alto Sax
TenorSax
Bari.Sax
Oboe
Eng.Horn
Bassoon
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
PanFlute
Bottle
Shakhchi
Whistle
Ocarina
: Same as Bank 0
E
Release
Bank 25
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 WaspySyn
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 NylonGt3
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1 Harpsi.2
2
E
Rezo Sweep
Bank 27 E
Muted
Bank 28
2
ClaviWah
2
2
FlangeBa
ResoSlap
Reso Str
SynBrss3
Converge
Prologue
: No sound E: Element number
2
2
MutePkBa
1
2
2
2
2
MuteBnjo
E
Detune 1
Bank 32
Det.CP80
Chor.EP1
Chor.EP2
DetDrwOr
DetPrcOr
ChurOrg3
AccordIt
Harmo. 2
Jazz Amp
ChorusGt
1
Fretles2
PunchThm
SmthSynB
MelChoir
Warm Trp
FrHorn 2
JumpBrss
1
DetSitar
2
2
1
2
E
Detune 2
Bank 33 E
Detune 3
Bank 34 E
Octave 1
Bank 35 E
Octave 2
Bank 36 E
5th 1
Bank 37
2
2
2 DX Hard 2 DXLegend 2
Harpsi.3
2
E
5th 2
Bank 38 E
Bend
Bank 39 E
Tutti
Bank 40
PianoStr 2
E
LayerCP1
HardEl.P
DX Phase
2
2
2
2
2
2 60sDrOr1
2 Lite Org
2
2 Fretles3
2
2
2
2
2
2 60sDrOr2
2
2 Fretles4
Dulcimr2 2
2 70sDrOr1 2 DrawOrg2
2
ChurOrg2
12StrGtr
Clv Bass
60sStrng
OrchHit2
Tp&TbSec
Big Five
RndGlock
Sitar 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 60sDrOr3
PercOrg2
HornOrch
2 Even Bar
2
2
2 16+2"2/3
NotreDam
Puff Org
Nyln&Stl
FunkGtr1
FeedbkGt
JazzRthm
Ba&DstEG
Susp.Str
YangChin
Orchestr
Warm Str
ChoirStr
SyVoice2
BrssSec2
SynBrss4
Sax Sect
BrthTnSx
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TechnoBa 2
ModulrBa 2
PulseSaw
GlockChi
Nylon EP
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
CP300 Owner’s Manual
109
XG Voice List
Instrument
Group
Piano
Chromatic
Percussion
Organ
Guitar
Bass
Strings
Ensemble
Brass
Reed
Pipe
Synth Lead
Synth Pad
Synth Effects
Ethnic
Percussive
Sound Effects
Pgm#
86
87
88
89
82
83
84
85
90
91
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
80
81
96
97
98
99
92
93
94
95
Pad 4 (choir)
Pad 5 (bowed)
Pad 6 (metallic)
Pad 7 (halo)
Pad 8 (sweep)
FX 1 (rain)
FX 2 (soundtrack)
FX 3 (crystal)
100 FX 4 (atmosphere)
101 FX 5 (brightness)
102 FX 6 (goblins)
103 FX 7 (echoes)
104 FX 8 (sci-fi)
105 Sitar
106 Banjo
107 Shamisen
108 Koto
109 Kalimba
110 Bagpipe
111 Fiddle
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
Pan Flute
Blown Bottle
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
Lead 1 (square)
Lead 2 (sawtooth)
Lead 3 (calliope)
Lead 4 (chiff)
Lead 5 (charang)
Lead 6 (voice)
Lead 7 (fifths)
Lead 8 (bass+lead)
Pad 1 (new age)
Pad 2 (warm)
Pad 3 (polysynth)
112 Shanai
113 Tinkle Bell
114 Agogo
115 Steel Drums
116 Woodblock
117 Taiko Drum
118 Melodic Tom 1
119 Synth Drum
120 Reverse Cymbal
121 Guitar Fret Noise
122 Breath Noise
123 Seashore
124 Bird Tweet
125 Telephone Ring
126 Helicopter
127 Applause
128 Gunshot
66
67
68
69
62
63
64
65
70
71
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
60
61
46
47
48
49
42
43
44
45
50
51
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
40
41
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
30
31
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
20
21
1
8
9
6
7
10
11
4
5
2
3
Bank 0
Bank Select LSB=00
Acoustic Grand Piano
Bright Acoustic Piano
Electric Grand Piano
Honky-tonk Piano
Electric Piano 1
Electric Piano 2
Harpsichord
Clavi
Celesta
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Vibraphone
Marimba
Xylophone
Tubular Bells
Dulcimer
Drawbar Organ 1
Percussive Organ
Rock Organ
Church Organ 1
Reed Organ
Accordion
Hamonica
Tango Accordion
Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1
Acoustic Guitar (steel)
Electric Guitar (jazz)
Electric Guitar (clean)
Electric Guitar (muted)
Overdriven Guitar
Distortion Guitar
Bank 0
Guitar Harmonics
Acoustic Bass
Electric Bass (finger)
Electric Bass (pick)
Fretless Bass
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Tremolo Strings
Pizzicato Strings
Orchestral Harp
Timpani
String Ensemble 1
String Ensemble 2
Synth Strings 1
Synth Strings 2
Choir Aahs
Voice Oohs
Synth Voice
Syn.Str2
ChoirAah
VoiceOoh
SynVoice
Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit
Trumpet Trumpet
Trombone
Tuba
Trombone
Tuba
Muted Trumpet
French Horn
Mute.Trp
Fr. Horn
Brass Section 1
Synth Brass 1
Synth Brass 2
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
Tenor Sax
Baritone Sax
Oboe
English Horn
Bassoon
BrasSect
SynBrss1
SynBrss2
SprnoSax
Alto Sax
TenorSax
Bari.Sax
Oboe
Eng.Horn
Bassoon
Viola
Cello
Contrabs
Trem.Str
Pizz.Str
Harp
Timpani
Strings1
Strings2
Syn.Str1
GtrHarmo
Aco.Bass
FngrBass
PickBass
Fretless
SlapBas1
SlapBas2
SynBass1
SynBass2
Violin
Acordion
Harmnica
TangoAcd
NylonGtr
SteelGtr
Jazz Gtr
CleanGtr
Mute.Gtr
Ovrdrive
Dist.Gtr
Vibes
Marimba
Xylophon
TubulBel
Dulcimer
DrawOrgn
PercOrgn
RockOrgn
ChrchOrg
ReedOrgn
GrandPno
BritePno
El.Grand
HnkyTonk
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
Harpsi.
Clavi.
Celesta
Glocken
MusicBox
Goblins
Echoes
Sci-Fi
Sitar
Banjo
Shamisen
Koto
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
ChoirPad
BowedPad
MetalPad
Halo Pad
SweepPad
Rain
SoundTrk
Crystal
Atmosphr
Bright
Saw Ld
CaliopLd
Chiff Ld
CharanLd
Voice Ld
Fifth Ld
Bass&Ld
NewAgePd
Warm Pad
PolySyPd
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
PanFlute
Bottle
Shakhchi
Whistle
Ocarina
SquareLd
Shanai
TnklBell
Agogo
SteelDrm
Woodblok
TaikoDrm
MelodTom
Syn Drum
RevCymbl
FretNoiz
BrthNoiz
Seashore
Tweet
Telphone
Helicptr
Applause
Gunshot
E Bank 41
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 ClearBel
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 Dr. Lead
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1 Choral
1
1
1 Hi Brass
2
1 ChoirBrs
1
1
2
1
1 SoftTenr
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 DX Bass
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Orchstr2
1 Kingdom
2
2 Dream
1
2
2
2
2
2 LayerCP2
2
1
2 DX+Analg
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1 Stl&Body
1
1
1 MuteStlG
1
1 FeedbkG2
E
2
2
Bank 42
2 DXKotoEP
2
2
2
2
2 TremOrch
2
2
2 MelloBrs
2
2
2
2 ChorBell
E
Velo-Switch
Bank 43 E
Velo-Xfade
Bank 45 E other wave
Bank 64 E
2
2
2
2
VelGtHrm
FunkGtr2
Gt.Pinch
FngrSlap
VeloSlap
HyprAlto
2
2
2
2
VX El.P1
VX El.P2
HardVibe
2 Jazz Man
VXUprght
2 FngBass2
2 60sEl.P1
2
2
1
2
2
Velo.Str 2
AnVelBr1
AnVelBr2
VeloLead
ClaviPad
2
PulseClv
Orgel
SineMrmb
Organ Ba
RotaryOr
OrgFlute
TngoAcd2
Orbiter
X WireBa
70s Str
Syn Str4
AnaVoice
Impact
2 AnaBrss1
2 AnaBrss2
TnrSax 2
Mellow
Rubby
DistLead
Vox Lead
Fat&Prky
Fantasy
Horn Pad
PolyPd80
Heaven
Glacier
Tine Pad
PolarPad
2 HrmoRain
Ancestrl
SynMalet
NylnHarp
FantaBel
GobSynth
EchoBell
Starz
Shanai 2
Mel Tom2
Ana Tom
1
1 PierceCl
2
2
1 70sDrOr2
2 SloRotar
2 TrmOrgFl
2
2 Sqr.Bass
2
1 Strings3
2 Syn Str5
1
2
2
2
1
2 SoloSine
2
PureLead
2 WireLead
2
2 Soft Wrl
2
2 RotarStr
2 ClickPad
2
2 GlassPad
2 Pan Pad
2
2 AfrcnWnd
2
1 SftCryst
2 Harp Vox
2
2 Creeper
2 Big Pan
2
1
Bank 65
GtFeedbk
Mod.Bass
1 Real Tom
1 ElecPerc
E
2
2 CheezOrg
2 FstRotar
2
1 GtrHrmo2
2
1 RubberBa
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 Ana. Pad
Itopia
2
Bank 66
2 SineLead
Celstial
2 Carib
2 LoudGlok
2 AtmosPad
2 Ring Pad
2 SynPiano
2 Rock Tom
E
2 DrawOrg3
2
1
2
1
2 SquarPad
2 CC Pad
2
2
Bank 67
2 ChrstBel
2 Planet
2 Ritual
2 Creation
2
E
2
2
2
Bank 68
2 VibeBell
2
2 ToHeaven
2 StarDust
E Bank 69
2 DigiBell
2
2 Reso&Pan
E Bank 70
2 AirBells
2
Night
E Bank 71
2 BellHarp
2 Glisten
E
2
2
: Same as Bank 0 : No sound E: Element number
110
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Pad 4 (choir)
Pad 5 (bowed)
Pad 6 (metallic)
Pad 7 (halo)
Pad 8 (sweep)
FX 1 (rain)
FX 2 (soundtrack)
FX 3 (crystal)
FX 4 (atmosphere)
FX 5 (brightness)
FX 6 (goblins)
FX 7 (echoes)
FX 8 (sci-fi)
Sitar
Banjo
Shamisen
Koto
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
Pan Flute
Blown Bottle
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
Lead 1 (square)
Lead 2 (sawtooth)
Lead 3 (calliope)
Lead 4 (chiff)
Lead 5 (charang)
Lead 6 (voice)
Lead 7 (fifths)
Lead 8 (bass+lead)
Pad 1 (new age)
Pad 2 (warm)
Pad 3 (polysynth)
Shanai
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
Steel Drums
Woodblock
Taiko Drum
Melodic Tom 1
Synth Drum
Reverse Cymbal
Guitar Fret Noise
Breath Noise
Seashore
Bird Tweet
Telephone Ring
Helicopter
Applause
Gunshot
Bank 0
Bank Select LSB=00
Acoustic Grand Piano
Bright Acoustic Piano
Electric Grand Piano
Honky-tonk Piano
Electric Piano 1
Electric Piano 2
Harpsichord
Clavi
Celesta
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Vibraphone
Marimba
Xylophone
Tubular Bells
Dulcimer
Drawbar Organ 1
Percussive Organ
Rock Organ
Church Organ 1
Reed Organ
Accordion
Hamonica
Tango Accordion
Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1
Acoustic Guitar (steel)
Electric Guitar (jazz)
Electric Guitar (clean)
Electric Guitar (muted)
Overdriven Guitar
Distortion Guitar
Bank 0
Guitar Harmonics
Acoustic Bass
Electric Bass (finger)
Electric Bass (pick)
Fretless Bass
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Tremolo Strings
Pizzicato Strings
Orchestral Harp
Timpani
String Ensemble 1
String Ensemble 2
Synth Strings 1
Synth Strings 2
Choir Aahs
Voice Oohs
Synth Voice
Syn.Str2
ChoirAah
VoiceOoh
SynVoice
Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit
Trumpet Trumpet
Trombone
Tuba
Trombone
Tuba
Muted Trumpet
French Horn
Mute.Trp
Fr. Horn
Brass Section 1
Synth Brass 1
Synth Brass 2
Soprano Sax
Alto Sax
Tenor Sax
Baritone Sax
Oboe
English Horn
Bassoon
BrasSect
SynBrss1
SynBrss2
SprnoSax
Alto Sax
TenorSax
Bari.Sax
Oboe
Eng.Horn
Bassoon
Viola
Cello
Contrabs
Trem.Str
Pizz.Str
Harp
Timpani
Strings1
Strings2
Syn.Str1
GtrHarmo
Aco.Bass
FngrBass
PickBass
Fretless
SlapBas1
SlapBas2
SynBass1
SynBass2
Violin
Acordion
Harmnica
TangoAcd
NylonGtr
SteelGtr
Jazz Gtr
CleanGtr
Mute.Gtr
Ovrdrive
Dist.Gtr
Vibes
Marimba
Xylophon
TubulBel
Dulcimer
DrawOrgn
PercOrgn
RockOrgn
ChrchOrg
ReedOrgn
GrandPno
BritePno
El.Grand
HnkyTonk
E.Piano1
E.Piano2
Harpsi.
Clavi.
Celesta
Glocken
MusicBox
Goblins
Echoes
Sci-Fi
Sitar
Banjo
Shamisen
Koto
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
ChoirPad
BowedPad
MetalPad
Halo Pad
SweepPad
Rain
SoundTrk
Crystal
Atmosphr
Bright
Saw Ld
CaliopLd
Chiff Ld
CharanLd
Voice Ld
Fifth Ld
Bass&Ld
NewAgePd
Warm Pad
PolySyPd
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
PanFlute
Bottle
Shakhchi
Whistle
Ocarina
SquareLd
Shanai
TnklBell
Agogo
SteelDrm
Woodblok
TaikoDrm
MelodTom
Syn Drum
RevCymbl
FretNoiz
BrthNoiz
Seashore
Tweet
Telphone
Helicptr
Applause
Gunshot
Pipe
Synth Lead
Synth Pad
Synth Effects
Ethnic
Percussive
Sound Effects
106
107
108
109
102
103
104
105
110
111
96
97
98
99
92
93
94
95
100
101
86
87
88
89
82
83
84
85
90
91
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
80
81
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
116
117
118
119
112
113
114
115
120
121
Bass
Strings
Ensemble
Brass
Reed
66
67
68
69
62
63
64
65
70
71
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
60
61
46
47
48
49
42
43
44
45
50
51
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
40
41
Instrument
Group
Piano
Pgm#
1
8
Chromatic 9
Percussion
6
7
10
11
4
5
2
3
Organ
Guitar
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
30
31
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
20
21
E Bank 72
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 Gamelmba
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
E
2
Bank 96
ChrchBel
Cimbalom
Ukulele
Mandolin
SynFretl
Hammer
Seq Ana.
Smokey
BelChoir
Tambra
Rabab
Taisho-k
Pungi
Bonang
Castanet
Gr.Cassa
E
2 Carillon
2 Santur
1
2
2 SmthFrtl
2
2
2
2
2 Tamboura
2 Gopichnt
2 Kanoon
1 Hichriki
2 Altair
1
1
Bank 97
Balimba
GlasPerc
E
2
Bank 98
2 Log Drum
2
2
2
2 Oud
2
2
2 Gamelan
2 ThaiBell
E
2
2
Bank 99
2 S.Gamlan
2
E Bank 100 E Bank 101 E
2 Rama Cym 2 AsianBel 2
XG Voice List
Bank Select MSB=64
104
105
106
107
100
101
102
103
108
109
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
98
99
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
88
89
74
75
76
77
70
71
72
73
78
79
124
125
126
127
128
120
121
122
123
114
115
116
117
110
111
112
113
118
119
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
68
69
54
55
56
57
50
51
52
53
58
59
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
48
49
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
28
29
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
18
19
Pgm#
7
8
5
6
9
3
4
1
2
SFX
Bank 0
CuttngNz
CttngNz2
Str Slap
Fl.KClik
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Dog
Horse
Tweet 2
Ghost
Maou
1
1
PhonCall 1
DoorSqek 1
Door Slam
ScratchC
ScratchS 2
1
1
WindChim
Telphon2
1
1
CarEIgnt
CarTSqel
Car Pass
CarCrash
Siren
Train
JetPlane
Starship
Burst
Coaster 2
Submarin 2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart
Footstep
MchinGun
LaserGun
Xplosion
Firework
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
E
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CP300 Owner’s Manual
111
XG Drum Kit List
• Key-off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.
• Alternate Group: Playing any instrument within a numbered group will immediately stop the sound of any other instrument in the same group of the same number
Bank Select MSB (0-127)
Bank Select LSB (0-127)
Program Change (1-128)
MIDI
Note# Note
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
47
88
89
90
91
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
76
77
78
79
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
13
14
15
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
G#-1
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
C#-1
D-1
D#-1
E-1
F-1
F#-1
G-1
127
0
1
Key
Off
Alternate
Group
3
3
O
O
O
O
O
O
4
4
1
1
1
2
2
Standard Kit1
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch H
Scratch L
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare Soft
Sticks
Kick Soft
Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight
Kick
Side Stick
Snare
Hand Clap
Snare Tight
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
127
0
2
Standard Kit2
Snare Soft 2
127
0
9
Room Kit
127
0
17
Rock Kit
Snare Noisy
Open Rim Shot H Short
Kick Short
Side Stick Light
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snappy
Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6
Kick 2
Kick Gate
Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
127
0
25
Electro Kit
127
0
26
Analog Kit
Same as Standard Kit 1
No Sound
127
0
28
Dance Kit
Reverse Cymbal
Hi Q 2
Snare Snappy Electro
Kick 3
Kick Gate
Kick Gate Heavy
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6
Reverse Cymbal
Hi Q 2
Snare Noisy 4
Reverse Cymbal
Hi Q 2
Snare Techno
Kick 3
Kick Analog Short
Kick Analog
Side Stick Analog
Snare Analog
Kick Techno Q
Rim Gate
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno
Side Stick Analog
Snare Clap
Snare Analog 2
Tom Analog 1
Hi-Hat Closed Analog
Tom Analog 2
Snare Dry
Tom Analog 1
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Tom Analog 2
Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 3
Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 3
Hi-Hat Open Analog
Tom Analog 4
Hi-Hat Open 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Tom Analog 5
Crash Analog
Tom Analog 6
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cowbell Analog
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Maracas 2
Claves 2
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cowbell Analog
Conga Analog H
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Maracas 2
Claves 2
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
112
CP300 Owner’s Manual
XG Drum Kit List
Bank Select MSB (0-127)
Bank Select LSB (0-127)
Program Change (1-128)
MIDI
Note# Note
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
44
45
46
47
88
89
90
91
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
76
77
78
79
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
32
33
34
35
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
13
14
15
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
G#-1
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
C#-1
D-1
D#-1
E-1
F-1
F#-1
G-1
Key
Off
O
O
O
O
O
O
Alternate
Group
4
4
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
127
0
33
Jazz Kit
Snare Jazz H
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
127
0
41
Brush Kit
127
0
49
Symphony Kit
126
0
1
SFX Kit1
126
0
2
SFX Kit2
Brush Slap 2
Open Rim Shot Light
Kick Jazz
Side Stick Light
Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
Kick Soft 2
Gran Cassa
Gran Cassa Mute
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal Short
Cutting Noise
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Hand Cymbal 2
Hand Cymbal 2 Short
Phone Call
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Wind Chime
Telephone Ring 2
Car Engine Ignition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet 2
Ghost
Maou
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
CP300 Owner’s Manual
113
Effect Type List
■ Reverb
Reverb types that can be selected by panel operation
Type MSB Type LSB
2 17
1
1
19
17
3
4
17
16
Effect Name
Room 4
Hall 4
Hall 3
Stage 3
Plate 2
Display
Room
Hall 1
Hall 2
Stage
Plate
All reverb types
4
4
16
17
3
4
3
3
18
19
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type MSB Type LSB
0 0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
6
7
17
19
6
7
17
0
2
5
0
1
7
16
0
0
1
17
18
0
0
0
No Effect
Effect Name
Hall 1
Hall 2
Hall M
Hall L
Hall 3
Hall 4
Room 1
Room 2
Room 3
Room S
Room M
Room L
Room 4
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Sound Board
Plate 1
GM Plate
Plate 2
White Room
Tunnel
Canyon
Basement
■ Chorus
Chorus types that can be selected by panel operation
Type MSB Type LSB
65
66
67
8
8
1
Effect Name
Chorus 4
Celeste 4
Flanger 2
Display
Chorus
Celeste
Flanger
All chorus types
67
67
67
67
68
68
72
72
72
87
Type MSB Type LSB
0 0
65
65
0
1
65
65
65
65
65
2
3
4
5
6
65
65
66
66
66
66
66
1
2
8
18
7
8
0
8
0
16
0
1
7
0
8
20
0
Effect Name
No Effect
Chorus 1
Chorus 2
Chorus 3
GM Chorus 1
GM Chorus 2
GM Chorus 3
GM Chorus 4
FB Chorus
Chorus 4
Celeste 1
Celeste 2
Celeste 3
Celeste 4
Rotary Speaker 1
Flanger 1
Flanger 2
GM Flanger
Flanger 3
Symphonic 1
Symphonic 2
Phaser 1
Phaser 2
Phaser 3
Ens Detune
■ Variation/Insertion
Variation/insertion types that can be selected by panel operation
Type MSB Type LSB
5 16
6
7
0
0
8
68
66
70
0
16
18
22
119
71
72
78
3
75
83
18
26
16
0
27
20
21
Effect Name Display
DelayL,C,R 2 Delay L,C,R
Delay L,R
Echo
Delay L,R
Echo
Cross Delay Cross Delay
Symphonic 2 Symphonic
RotarySpeaker1 Rotary Speaker
Tremolo 3 Tremolo
VibeRotor
Auto Pan 3
Phaser 3
Auto Wah 2
VibeRotor
Auto Pan
Phaser
Auto Wah
Sound Board Sound Board
AmpSimulator2 Amp Simulator
Compressor 2 Compressor
All variation/insertion effects
65
65
65
66
65
65
65
65
22
64
65
65
20
20
21
21
67
67
67
67
66
66
66
66
17
18
19
20
9
10
11
16
8
9
6
7
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
Type MSB Type LSB
0
1
0
0
1
2
1
1
1
6
7
0
7
0
1
18
5
6
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
16
8
0
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
0
0
0
8
1
2
7
8
0
1
1
2
8
18
Karaoke 2
Karaoke 3
Tempo Delay
Tempo Echo
Tempo Cross
Thru
Chorus1
Chorus2
Chorus3
GM Chorus 1
GM Chorus 2
GM Chorus 3
GM Chorus 4
FB Chorus
Chorus 4
Celeste 1
Celeste 2
Celeste 3
Celeste 4
Rotary Speaker 1
Flanger 1
Flanger 2
GM Flanger
Flanger 3
Plate
GM Plate
Delay L,C,R 1
Delay L,C,R 2
Delay L,R
Echo
Cross Delay
ER1
ER2
Gate Reverb
Reverse Gate
White Room
Tunnel
Canyon
Basement
Karaoke 1
No Effect
Hall 1
Effect Name
Hall 2
Hall M
Hall L
Room 1
Room 2
Room 3
Room S
Room M
Room L
Stage 1
Stage 2
Sound Board
Pitch Change 2
Hrm ENH
Touch Wah 1
Touch Wah + Dist
Touch Wah + OD
Touch Wah 2
Compressor 1
Compressor 2
Noise Gate
Voice Cancel
2 Way Rot Sp
Dist + 2 Rot Sp
OD + 2 Rot Sp
Amp Sim + 2 Rot Sp
Ens Detune
Ambience
Talk Mod
Lo-Fi
Dist + Delay
OD + Delay
Cmp + Dist + Dly
Cmp + OD + Dly
Wah + Dist + Dly
Wah + OD + Dly
V Dist Hard
V Dist H + Dly
V Dist Soft
V Dist S + Dly
Dual Rot Sp 1
Dual Rot Sp 2
Dist + Tmp Delay
OD + Tmp Delay
Cmp + Dist + TDly
Cmp + OD + TDly
Wah + Dist + TDly
Wah + OD + TDly
V Dist H + TDly
V Dist S + TDly
Vibe Rotor
Effect Name
Symphonic 1
Symphonic 2
Rotary Speaker 2
Dist + Rot Sp
OD + Rot Sp
Amp Sin + Rot Sp
Tremolo 1
Tremolo 2
Tremolo 3
AutoPan 1
AutoPan 2
AutoPan 3
Phaser 1
Phaser 2
Phaser 3
Distortion
Comp Dist
Stereo Dist
Over Drive
Stereo OD
Amp Simulator 1
Stereo Amp Sim
Amp Simulator 2
3 Band EQ
2 Band EQ
Auto Wah 1
Auto Wah + Dist
Auto Wah + OD
Auto Wah 2
Pitch Change 1
99
99
100
100
98
98
98
98
96
96
97
97
93
94
95
95
101
101
102
102
103
103
119
86
86
87
88
84
85
86
86
82
82
83
83
80
81
82
82
78
78
78
80
75
76
77
78
74
74
75
75
72
73
73
73
71
71
72
72
70
70
70
71
Type MSB Type LSB
68
68
0
16
69
69
69
69
0
1
2
3
26
27
0
8
0
19
22
0
1
2
21
0
26
0
0
0
0
8
0
8
20
0
1
8
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
2
3
0
1
0
0
2
8
0
16
0
1
1
0
114
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Effect Parameter List
Items with a dot indicator (●) in the Control column are parameters that can be controlled via assignable controllers.
Note that this is applicable to the Variation effects (while Insertion is selected) and to the Insertion effects.
HALL 1, HALL 2, HALL M, HALL L
ROOM 1, ROOM 2, ROOM 3, ROOM S, ROOM M, ROOM L
STAGE 1, STAGE 2
PLATE (Reverb, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Reverb Time
2 Diffusion
3 Initial Delay
0.3 – 30.0s
0 – 10
Display
0.1mS – 200.0mS (Rev)
0.1mS – 99.3mS (Var/Ins)
Thru – 8.0kHz
1.0k – Thru
6
7
4 HPF Cutoff
5 LPF Cutoff
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value See Table Control
0 – 69 table #4
0 – 10
0 – 127
0 – 63 table #5
0 – 52 table #3
34 – 60 table #3
1 – 127 (table #15) ●
11 Rev Delay 0.1mS – 200.0mS (Rev)
0.1mS – 99.3mS (Var/Ins)
0 – 4 12 Density
13 Er/Rev Balance
14 High Damp
E63>R – E=R – E<R63
0.1 – 1.0
15 Feedback Level -63 – +63
16
0 – 127
0 – 63
0 – 4 table #5
1 – 127
1 – 10
1 – 127 (table #16)
DELAY L, R (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter Display
1 Lch Delay
2 Rch Delay
0.1 – 1638.3ms
0.1 – 1638.3ms
3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1 – 1638.3ms
4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1 – 1638.3ms
5 Feedback Level -63 – +63
0.1 – 1.0
6 High Damp
7
8
Value
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
1 – 127
1 – 10
9
10 Dry/Wet
11
12
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
1 – 127
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
See Table Control table #3 table #3
●
HALL 3
HALL 4
ROOM 4
STAGE 3
PLATE 2 (Reverb)
No.
Parameter
1 Reverb Time
2 Diffusion
6
7
3 Initial Delay
4 HPF Cutoff
5 LPF Cutoff
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
11
12
13
14 High Damp
15
16
0.3 – 30.0s
0 – 10
Display
0.1mS – 99.3mS
Thru – 8.0kHz
1.0k – Thru
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
0.1 – 1.0
Value
0 – 69
0 – 10
0 – 63
0 – 52
34 – 60 table #3
1 – 127 (table #15)
1 – 10
See Table table #4 table #5 table #3
Control
●
DELAY L, C, R 1
DELAY L, C, R 2 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Lch Delay
2 Rch Delay
3 Cch Delay
4 Feedback Delay
8
9
5 Feedback Level
6 Cch Level
7 High Damp
-63 – +63
0 – 127
0.1 – 1.0
Display
0.1 – 1638.3ms
0.1 – 1638.3ms
0.1 – 1638.3ms
0.1 – 1638.3ms
Value See Table Control
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
1 – 127
0 – 127
1 – 10
10 Dry/Wet
11
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
1 – 127
4 – 40
14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76 table #3 table #3
●
ECHO (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter Display
1 Lch Delay1 0.1 – 1486.0ms
2 Lch Feedback Level -63 – +63
Value See Table Control
1 – 14860
1 – 127
3 Rch Delay1 0.1 – 1486.0ms
4 Rch Feedback Level -63 – +63
5 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0
6 Lch Delay2
7 Rch Delay2
0.1 – 1486.0ms
0.1 – 1486.0ms
0 – 127 8 Delay2 Level
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63
1 – 14860
1 – 127
1 – 10
1 – 14860
1 – 14860
0 – 127
1 – 127 ●
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76 table #3 table #3
CROSS DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 L –>R Delay
2 R –>L Delay
3 Feedback Level
4 Input Select
8
9
5 High Damp
6
7
0.1 – 1486.0ms
0.1 – 1486.0ms
-63 – +63
L, R, L&R
0.1 – 1.0
Display Value
1 – 14860
1 – 14860
1 – 127
0 – 2
1 – 10
10 Dry/Wet
11
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
1 – 127
4 – 40
14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
See Table Control table #3 table #3
●
EARLY REF 1, EARLY REF 2 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
Parameter
Type
2 Room Size
3 Diffusion
4 Initial Delay
5 Feedback Level -63 – +63
6 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz
1.0k – Thru 7 LPF Cutoff
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
11 Liveness
12 Density
13 High Damp
Display Value See Table Control
S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0 – 5
0.1 – 7.0
0 – 10
0.1ms – 200.0ms
0 – 44
0 – 10 table #6
0 – 127 table #5
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
0 – 10
0 – 3
0.1 – 1.0
1 – 127
0 – 52 table #3
34 – 60 table #3
1 – 127
0 – 10
0 – 3
1 – 10
●
14
15
16
CP300 Owner’s Manual
115
Effect Parameter List
GATE REVERB
REVERSE GATE (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Type
2 Room Size
3 Diffusion
Type A, Type B
0.1 – 7.0
0 – 10
Display
4 Initial Delay 0.1ms – 200.0ms
5 Feedback Level -63 – +63
6
7
8
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Thru – 8.0kHz
1.0k – Thru
9
10 Dry/Wet
11 Liveness
12 Density
13 High Damp
14
15
16
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
0 – 10
0 – 3
0.1 – 1.0
Value See Table Control
0 – 1
0 – 44
0 – 10 table #6
0 – 127 table #5
1 – 127
0 – 52 table #3
34 – 60 table #3
1 – 127
0 – 10
0 – 3
1 – 10
●
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT (Reverb, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Reverb Time
2 Diffusion
3 Initial Delay
4 HPF Cutoff
5 LPF Cutoff
6 Width
7 Height
8 Depth
9 Wall Vary
10 Dry/Wet
0.3 – 30.0s
0 – 10
Display
0.1ms – 99.3ms
Thru – 8.0kHz
1.0k – Thru
0.5 – 10.2m
0.5 – 20.2m
0.5 – 30.2m
0 – 30
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
11 Rev Delay
12 Density
13 Er/Rev Balance
14 High Damp
15 Feedback Level
16
0.1ms – 99.3ms
0 – 4
E63>R – E=R – E<R63
0.1 – 1.0
-63 – +63
Value See Table Control
0 – 69 table #4
0 – 10
0 – 63 table #5
0 – 52 table #3
34 – 60 table #3
0 – 37 table #11
0 – 73 table #11
0 – 104 table #11
0 – 30
1 – 127 ●
0 – 63
0 – 4
1 – 127
1 – 10
1 – 127 table #5
KARAOKE 1, 2, 3 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
4 LPF Cutoff
5
Display
1 Delay Time 0.1ms – 400.0ms
2 Feedback Level -63 – +63
3 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz
1.0k – Thru
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63
11 Density
12
13
14
15
16
0 – 3
Value See Table Control
0 – 127 table #7
1 – 127
0 – 52 table #3
34 – 60 table #3
1 – 127
0 – 3
●
TEMPO DELAY
TEMPO ECHO (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
2
Parameter
Delay Time
Feedback Level
3 Feedback High
Dump
4 L/R Diffusion
Display
64th/3 – 4thx6
-63 – +63
0 – 1.0
5 Lag
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value
0 – 19
1 – 127
0 – 10
1 – 127
1 – 127
1 – 127
See Table Control table #14
●
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
TEMPO CROSS (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
2 Delay Time R>L
3 Feedback Level
4
Parameter
Delay Time L>R
Input Select
5 Feedback High
Dump
6 Lag
Display
64th/3 – 4thx6
64th/3 – 4thx6
-63 – +63
L, R, L&R
0 – 1.0
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value See Table Control
0 – 19 table #14
0 – 19
1 – 127
0 – 2
0 – 10
1 – 127
1 – 127 table #14
●
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500 – 16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
CHORUS 1, 2, 3, 4
CELESTE 1, 2, 3, 4
GM CHORUS 1, 2, 3, 4
FB CHORUS
ROTARY SPEAKER 1 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
Value See Table Control
0 – 127 table #1
0 – 127
3 Feedback Level
4 Delay Offset
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-63 – +63
0.0mS – 50mS
-12 – +12dB
1 – 127
0 – 127
4 – 40
52 – 76 table #2 table #3
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10 Dry/Wet
28 – 58
52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
●
11 EQ Mid Frequency
(variation block)
12 EQ Mid Gain
(variation block)
13 EQ Mid Width
(variation block)
14
15 Input Mode
16
100Hz – 10.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
1.0 – 12.0
mono/stereo
14 – 54
52 – 76
10 – 120
0 – 1 table #3
FLANGER 1, 2, 3
GM FLANGER (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
Value See Table Control
0 – 127 table #1
0 – 127
3 Feedback Level
4 Delay Offset
5
6 EQ Low Frequency
7 EQ Low Gain
-63 – +63
0.0ms – 50ms
32Hz – 2.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
1 – 127
0 – 127
4 – 40
52 – 76 table #2 table #3
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10 Dry/Wet
28 – 58
52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
●
11 EQ Mid Frequency
(variation block)
12 EQ Mid Gain
(variation block)
13 EQ Mid Width
(variation block)
14 LFO Phase
Difference
15
16
100Hz – 10.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
1.0 – 12.0
-180 – +180deg
(resolution=3deg.)
14 – 54
52 – 76
10 – 120
4 – 124 table #3
116
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Effect Parameter List
SYMPHONIC 1, 2 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3 Delay Offset
4
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0.0ms – 50ms
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
4 – 40
See Table Control table #1 table #2 table #3
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10 Dry/Wet
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
●
11 EQ Mid Frequency
(variation block)
12 EQ Mid Gain
(variation block)
13 EQ Mid Width
(variation block)
14
15
16
100Hz – 10.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
1.0 – 12.0
DISTORTION+ROTARY SPEAKER
OVERDRIVE+ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)
1kHz – Thru
0 – 127
14 – 54
52 – 76
10 – 120
0 – 127
34 – 60
0 – 127 table #3
ROTARY SPEAKER 2 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
4
5
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
Display Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
See Table Control table #1
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
4 – 40
52 – 76 table #3
28 – 58 table #3
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
●
11 EQ Mid Frequency
(variation block)
12 EQ Mid Gain
(variation block)
13 EQ Mid Width
(variation block)
14
15
16
100Hz – 10.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
1.0 – 12.0
14 – 54
52 – 76
10 – 120 table #3
No.
4
5
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
Display Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500 – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
See Table Control
●
11
12
13
14 Drive
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
0 – 127
AMP SIM.+ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3 AMP Type
4
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
Value See Table Control
0 – 127 ●
0 – 127 0 – 127
Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 0 – 3
4 – 40
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10 Dry/Wet
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
11
12
13
14 Drive
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
0 – 127
1kHz – Thru
0 – 127
0 – 127
34 – 60
0 – 127
2
3
4
5
6
No.
1
7
8
9
10
TREMOLO 1, 2, 3 (Variation, Insertion block)
Parameter
LFO Frequency
AM Depth
PM Depth
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0 – 127
Display
EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
11 EQ Mid Frequency
(variation block)
12 EQ Mid Gain
(variation block)
13 EQ Mid Width
(variation block)
14 LFO Phase
Difference
15 Input Mode
16
100Hz – 10.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
1.0 – 12.0
-180 – +180deg
(resolution=3deg.) mono/stereo
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
4 – 40
See Table Control table #1
52 – 76
28 – 58 table #3
52 – 76
14 – 54
52 – 76
10 – 120
4 – 124
0 – 1 table #3 table #3
●
AUTO PAN 1, 2, 3 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
2
3
4
Parameter
LFO Frequency
L/R Depth
F/R Depth
PAN Direction
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0 – 127
L <–> R, L –> R, L <– R,
Lturn, Rturn, L/R
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10
Value See Table Control
0 – 127 table #1 ●
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 5
4 – 40
52 – 76 table #3
28 – 58 table #3
52 – 76
14 – 54 table #3 11 EQ Mid Frequency
(variation block)
12 EQ Mid Gain
(variation block)
13 EQ Mid Width
(variation block)
14
15
16
100Hz – 10.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
1.0 – 12.0
52 – 76
10 – 120
PHASER 1, 3 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3 Phase Shift Offset
4 Feedback Level
5
0 – 127
-63 – +63
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
Value
0 – 127
1 – 127
See Table Control
0 – 127 table #1
0 – 127
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
4 – 40
52 – 76 table #3
28 – 58 table #3
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●
11 Stage 4 – 22 (chorus, variation block)
4 – 12 (insertion block) mono/stereo
4 – 22
4 – 12
0 – 1 12 Diffusion
13
14
15
16
PHASER 2 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3 Phase Shift Offset
4 Feedback Level
5
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0 – 127
-63 – +63
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
1 – 127
See Table Control table #1
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10 Dry/Wet
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3 table #3
●
11 Stage
12
13 LFO Phase
Difference
14
15
16
3 – 11
-180deg – +180deg
(resolution=3deg.)
3 – 6
4 – 124
CP300 Owner’s Manual
117
Effect Parameter List
DISTORTION
OVERDRIVE (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter Display
1 Drive 0 – 127
2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
3 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
4 LPF Cutoff
5 Output Level
1.0k – Thru
0 – 127
Value
0 – 127
4 – 40
52 – 76
See Table table #3
34 – 60 table #3
0 – 127
6
7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz
8 EQ Mid Gain
9 EQ Mid Width
10 Dry/Wet
-12 – +12dB
14 – 54 table #3
52 – 76
1.0 – 12.0
10 – 120
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
Control
●
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127
12
13
14
15
16
COMP+DIST (Variation, Insertion block)
STEREO DISTORTION
STEREO OVER DRIVE (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Drive 0 – 127
2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
3 EQ Low Gain
4 LPF Cuttoff
5 Output Level
Display
-12 – +12dB
1kHz – Thru
0 – 127
0 – 127 mild – sharp
No.
Parameter
1 Drive 0 – 127
Display
2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
Value
0 – 127
4 – 40
52 – 76
34 – 60 table #3
0 – 127
See Table Control
● table #3
3 EQ Low Gain
4 LPF Cutoff
5 Output Level
-12 – +12dB
1.0k – Thru
0 – 127
6
7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz
8
9
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
10 Dry/Wet
14 – 54 table #3
-12 – +12dB
1.0 – 12.0
52 – 76
10 – 120
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127
12 Attack
13 Release
14 Threshold
15 Ratio
16
1ms – 40ms
10ms – 680ms
-48dB – -6dB
1.0 – 20.0
0 – 127 mild – sharp
0 – 19
0 – 15
79 – 121 table #8 table #9
0 – 7 table #10
Value See Table Control
0 – 127 ●
4 – 40
52 – 76 table #3
34 – 60
0 – 127
6
7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz
8 EQ Mid Gain
9 EQ Mid Width
10 Dry/Wet
-12 – +12dB
14 – 54 table #3
52 – 76
1 – 12 10 – 120
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
11 Edge (Clip Curve)
12
13
14
15
16
0 – 127
AMP SIMULATOR (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
Parameter
Drive
2 AMP Type
3 LPF Cutoff
4
5
6
Output Level
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
0 – 127
Display Value
0 – 127
See Table Control
●
Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 0 – 3
1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3
0 – 127 0 – 127
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127
12
13
14
15
16
0 – 127 mild – sharp
STEREO AMP SIMULATOR (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
Parameter
Drive
2 AMP Type
3 LPF Cuttoff
4
5
6
Output Level
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
0 – 127
Display Value
0 – 127
Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 0 – 3
1kHz – Thru 34 – 60
0 – 127 0 – 127
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127
12
13
14
15
16
0 – 127
See Table Control
●
3BAND EQ (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 EQ Low Gain
Display
-12 – +12dB
2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz
3 EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB
4 EQ Mid Width
5 EQ High Gain
1.0 – 12.0
-12 – +12dB
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 Input Mode
16 mono/stereo
Value
52 – 76
0 – 1
See Table
14 – 54 table #3
52 – 76
10 – 120
52 – 76
8 – 40 table #3
28 – 58 table #3
Control
11
12
13
14
15
16
2BAND EQ (Variation, Insertion block)
6
7
8
9
10
No.
Parameter
4 EQ High Gain
5
Display
1 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
2 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
Value
4 – 40
52 – 76
52 – 76
See Table table #3
28 – 58 table #3
Control
AUTO WAH 1, 2 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3 Cutoff Frequency
Offset
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0 – 127
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
See Table Control
0 – 127 table #1
4 Resonance
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
1.0 – 12.0
10 – 120
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3 table #3
●
11 Drive (variation block) 0 – 127
12
13
14
15
16
0 – 127
118
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Effect Parameter List
AUTO WAH+DIST
AUTO WHA+ODRV (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3 Cutoff Frequency
Offset
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0 – 127
Value
0 – 127
See Table Control
0 – 127 table #1
0 – 127
4 Resonance
5
1.0 – 12.0
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
10 – 120
4 – 40
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
52 – 76
28 – 58 table #3
0 – 127
-12 – +12dB
0 – 127
52 – 76
11 Drive
12 EQ Low Gain
(distortion)
13 EQ Mid Gain
(distortion)
14 LPF Cutoff
15 Output Level
16
-12 – +12dB
1.0kHz – thru
0 – 127
52 – 76
34 – 60
0 – 127 table #3
●
PITCH CHANGE 1 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
2
3
4
Pitch
Parameter
Initial Delay
Fine 1
Fine 2
5 Feedback Level
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
11 Pan 1
12 Output Level 1
13 Pan 2
14 Output Level 2
15
16
-24 – +24
Display
0.1ms – 400.0ms
-50 – +50
-50 – +50
-63 – +63
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
L63 – R63
0 – 127
L63 – R63
0 – 127
Value
40 – 88
0 – 127
14 – 114
14 – 114
1 – 127
1 – 127
1 – 127
0 – 127
1 – 127
0 – 127
See Table Control table #7
●
PITCH CHANGE 2 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
2
3
6
7
8
Pitch
Parameter
Initial Delay
Fine 1
4 Fine 2
5 Feedback Level
9
10 Dry/Wet
11 Pan 1
12 Output Level 1
13 Pan 2
14 Output Level 2
15
16
-24 – +24
Display
0.1ms – 400.0ms
-50 – +50cent
-50 – +50cent
-63 – +63
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
L63 – R63
0 – 127
L63 – R63
0 – 127
Value
40 – 88
0 – 127
14 – 114
14 – 114
1 – 127
1 – 127
1 – 127
0 – 127
1 – 127
0 – 127
See Table Control table #7
●
No.
Parameter
1 HPF Cutoff
2 Drive
3 Mix Level
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5
6
7
8
9
HARMONIC ENHANCER (Variation, Insertion block)
Display
500Hz – 16.0kHz
0 – 127
0 – 127
Value See Table Control
28 – 58
0 – 127
0 – 127
TOUCH WAH 1
TOUCH WAH+DIST (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Sensitive
2 Cutoff Frequency
Offset
3 Resonance
0 – 127
0 – 127
11 Drive (variation block) 0 – 127
12
13
14
15
16
Display Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
See Table Control
1.0 – 12.0
10 – 120
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
4 – 40
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
52 – 76
28 – 58 table #3
0 – 127
●
TOUCH WAH 2
TOUCH WAH+ODRV (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Sensitive
2 Cutoff Frequency
Offset
3 Resonance
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency
7 EQ Low Gain
0 – 127
0 – 127
Display
1.0 – 12.0
32Hz – 2.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
10 – 120
4 – 40
52 – 76
See Table Control table #3
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10 Dry/Wet
28 – 58
52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
●
11 Drive (variation block) 0 – 127
12 EQ Low Gain
(variation block)
(distortion)
-12 – +12dB
-12 – +12dB 13 EQ Mid Gain
(variation block)
(distortion)
14 LPF Cutoff (variation block)
15 Output Level
(variation block)
16 Release (variation block)
1.0kHz – thru
0 – 127
10 – 680ms
0 – 127
52 – 76
52 – 76
34 – 60
0 – 127
52 – 67 table #3 table #12
11
12
13
14
15
16
COMPRESSOR 1, 2 (Variation, Insertion block)
Display
1 – 40ms
10 – 680ms
-48 – -6dB
1.0 – 20.0
0 – 127
7
8
9
10
No.
Parameter
1 Attack
2 Release
3 Threshold
4 Ratio
5 Output Level
6
11
12
13
14
15
16
NOISE GATE (Variation, Insertion block)
Display
1 – 40ms
10 – 680ms
-72 – -30dB
0 – 127
7
8
9
10
No.
Parameter
1 Attack
2 Release
3 Threshold
4 Output Level
5
6
Value See Table Control
0 – 19 table #8
0 – 15
79 – 121
0 – 7
0 – 127 table #9 table #10
Value See Table Control
0 – 19
0 – 15
55 – 97
0 – 127 table #8 table #9
CP300 Owner’s Manual
119
Effect Parameter List
VOICE CANCEL (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
7
8
9
10
2
3
4
5
6
Parameter Display
11 Low Adjust
12 High Adjust
13
14
15
16
0 – 26
0 – 26
Value
0 – 26
0 – 26
See Table Control
2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
2
3
Parameter
Rotor Speed
Drive Low
Drive High
Display
0.0Hz – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0 – 127
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1 – 127
See Table Control table #1 ●
4 Low/High
5
6 EQ Low Frequency
9
10
EQ High Gain
32Hz – 2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76 table #3 table #3
11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz
12 Mic L – R Angle 0deg – 180deg
(resolution=3deg.)
13
14
15
16
14 – 54 table #3
0 – 60
DIST+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER
OD+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Rotor Speed
2 Drive Low
Display
0.0 – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
3 Drive High
4 Low/High Balance
5
6
7
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
0 – 127
32 – 2.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
10
0 – 127
L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1 – 127
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz
12 Mic L – R Angle
13
14 Drive
0 – 180deg
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
1kHz – Thru
14 – 54
0 – 60
0 – 127
34 – 60
0 – 127
See Table Control
●
AMP SIM.+2WAY ROTARY SP (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Rotor Speed
2 Drive Low
3 Drive High
4 Low/High Balance
5
6 EQ Low Frequency
7 EQ Low Gain
8 EQ High Frequency
9 EQ High Gain
10
Display
0.0 – 39.7Hz
0 – 127
0 – 127
Value
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1 – 127
See Table Control
●
32Hz – 2.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
500Hz – 16.0kHz
-12 – +12dB
4 – 40
52 – 76
28 – 58
52 – 76
11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz
12 Mic L – R Angle 0 – 180deg
13 AMP Type Off, Stack, Combo,
Tube (AMPSIM only)
14 Drive
15 LPF Cuttoff
16 Output Level
1kHz – Thru
14 – 54
0 – 60
0 – 3
0 – 127
34 – 60
0 – 127
ENSEMBLE DETUNE (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
4
5
6
Parameter
Detune
2 Lch Init Delay
3 Rch Init Delay
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
Display
-50 – +50cent
0.0mS – 50mS
0.0mS – 50mS
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value
14 – 114
0 – 127
0 – 127
1 – 127
See Table Control table #2 table #2
●
11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
12 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
-12 – +12dB 14 EQ High Gain
15
16
4 – 40
52 – 76 table #3
28 – 58 table #3
52 – 76
11
12
13
14
15
16
AMBIENCE (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Delay Time
2 Output Phase
3
Display
0.0mS – 50mS normal/inverse
Value
0 – 127
0 – 1
See Table Control table #2
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
4 – 40
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
52 – 76
28 – 58 table #3
●
11
12
13
14
15
16
TALKING MODULATION (Variation, Insertion block) a, i, u, e, o
1 – 62
0 – 127
0 – 127
Display
6
7
8
9
10
No.
Parameter
1 Vowel
2 Move speed
3 Drive
4 Output Level
5
Value See Table Control
0 – 4 ●
1 – 62
0 – 127
0 – 127
LO-FI (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
6
9
Parameter
1 Sampling Freq
Control
2 Word Length
3 Output Gain
4 LPF Cutoff
5 Filter Type
LPF Resonance
7 Bit Assign
8 Emphasis
10 Dry/Wet
Display
44.1kHz – 345Hz
1 – 127
-6 – +12dB
63Hz – Thru
Thru, PowerBass, Radio,
Tel, Clean, Low
1.0 – 12.0
0 – 6
Off/On
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value
0 – 127
1 – 127
0 – 18
10 – 60
0 – 5
10 – 120
0 – 6
0 – 1
1 – 127
See Table Control table #13 table #3
●
11
12
13
14
15 Input Mode
16 mono/stereo
120
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Effect Parameter List
11
12
13
14
15
16
DIST+DELAY
OVERDRIVE+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Lch Delay Time
2 Rch Delay Time
3 Delay Feedback
Time
Display
0.1 – 1638.3ms
0.1 – 1638.3ms
0.1 – 1638.3ms
Value
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
1 – 16383
4 Delay Feedback
Level
5
6
Delay Mix
Dist Drive
10 Dry/Wet
-63 – +63
0 – 127
0 – 127
7 Dist Output Level 0 – 127
8 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
9 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB
1 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
52 – 76
52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
See Table Control
●
COMP+DIST+DELAY
COMP+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Delay Time
2 Delay Feedback
Level
3 Delay Mix 0 – 127
4 Dist Drive 0 – 127
5 Dist Output Level 0 – 127
Display
0.1 – 1638.3ms
-63 – +63
Value
1 – 16383
1 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
7 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63
52 – 76
52 – 76
1 – 127
See Table Control
●
11 Comp. Attack
12 Comp. Release
13 Comp. Threshold
14 Comp. Ratio
15
16
1ms – 40ms
10ms – 680ms
-48dB – -6dB
1.0 – 20.0
0 – 19
0 – 15
79 – 121
0 – 7 table #8 table #9 table #10
WAH+DIST+DELAY
WAH+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Delay Time
2 Delay Feedback
Level
3 Delay Mix
4 Dist Drive
0 – 127
0 – 127
5 Dist Output Level 0 – 127
6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
7 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
0.1 – 1638.3ms
-63 – +63
Display
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value
1 – 16383
1 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
52 – 76
52 – 76
1 – 127
See Table Control
●
11 Wah Sensitive
12 Wah Cutoff Freq
Offset
13 Wah Resonance
14 Wah Release
15
16
0 – 127
0 – 127
1.0 – 12.0
10 – 680ms
0 – 127
0 – 127
10 – 120
52 – 67 table #12
11
12
13
14
15
16
V DISTORTION HARD
V DISTORTION SOFT (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
1
2
Parameter
Overdrive
Device
Display
0 – 100%
Transistor/Vintage Tube/
Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz
3
6
7
8
Speaker
4 Presence
5 Output Level
Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/
Radio/Megaphone
0 – 20
0 – 100%
9
10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value See Table Control
0 – 100
0 – 4
0 – 5
0 – 20
0 – 100
1 – 127 ●
V DISTORTION HARD+DELAY
V DISTORTION SOFT+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Overdrive
2 Device
3
4
Speaker
Presence
5 Output Level
6 Delay Time L
7 Delay Time R
8 Delay Feedback
Time
9 Delay Feedback
Level
10 Dry/Wet Balance
-63 – +63
Display
0 – 100%
Transistor/Vintage Tube/
Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz
Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/
Radio/Megaphone
0 – 20
0 – 100%
0.1ms – 1486.0ms
0.1ms – 1486.0ms
0.1ms – 1486.0ms
D63>W – D=W – D<W63
Value
0 – 100
0 – 4
0 – 5
0 – 20
0 – 100
1 – 14860
1 – 14860
1 – 14860
1 – 127
1 – 127
See Table Control
●
11 Delay Mix
12
13
14
15
16
0 – 127 0 – 127
DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER1, 2 (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Rotor Speed Slow
2 Horn Speed Slow
Display
0.0 – 2.65Hz
0.0 – 2.65Hz
3 Rotor Speed Fast
4 Horn Speed Fast
2.69 – 39.7Hz
2.69 – 39.7Hz
5 Slow-Fast Time of R 0 – 127
Value
0 – 63
0 – 63
6 Slow-Fast Time of H 0 – 127
7 Drive Low 0 – 127
8
9
10
Drive High
Low/High Balance
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127 0 – 127
L63>H – L=H – L<H=63 1 – 127 table #1 table #1
64 – 127 table #1
64 – 127 table #1
0 – 127
See Table Control
11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
12 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
14 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
15 Mic L-R Angle
16 Speed Control
0 – 180deg
Slow/Fast
4 – 40 table #3
52 – 76
28 – 58 table #3
52 – 76
0 – 60
0/1 ●
11
12
13
14
15
16
DIST+TEMPO DELAY
OVERDRIVE+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Delay Time
2 Delay Feedback
Level
3
4
Delay Mix
Dist Drive
5 Dist Output Level
6 Dist EQ Low Gain
Display
64th/3 – 4thx6
-63 – +63
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
-12 – +12dB
Value See Table Control
0 – 19
1 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
52 – 76
7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
8 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
9 Lag
10 Dry/Wet
52 – 76
1 – 127
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
1 – 127
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #14
●
COMP+DIST+TEMPO DELAY
COMP+OD+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Delay Time
2 Delay Feedback
Level
3
4
Delay Mix
Dist Drive
5 Dist Output Level
6 Dist EQ Low Gain
Display
64th/3 – 4thx6
-63 – +63
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
-12 – +12dB
Value See Table Control
0 – 19
1 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
52 – 76
7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
8 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
9 Lag
10 Dry/Wet
52 – 76
1 – 127
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
1 – 127
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #14
●
11 Comp. Attack
12 Comp. Release
13 Comp. Threshold
14 Comp. Ratio
15
16
1ms – 40ms
10ms – 680ms
-48dB – -6dB
1.0 – 20.0
0 – 19
0 – 15
79 – 121
0 – 7
CP300 Owner’s Manual
121
Effect Parameter List
WAH+DIST+TEMPO DELAY
WAH+OD+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Delay Time
2 Delay Feedback
Level
3 Delay Mix
4 Dist Drive
5 Dist Output Level
6 Dist EQ Low Gain
64th/3 – 4thx6
-63 – +63
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
Display
-12 – +12dB
Value
0 – 19
1 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
0 – 127
52 – 76
7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB
8 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
9 Lag
10 Dry/Wet
52 – 76
1 – 127
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
1 – 127
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127
See Table Control table #14
●
11 Wah Sensitive
12 Wah Cutoff Freq
Offset
13 Wah Resonance
14 Wah Release
15
16
0 – 127
0 – 127
1.0 – 12.0
10 – 680mS
0 – 127
0 – 127
10 – 120
52 – 67
V DIST HARD+TEMPO DELAY
V DIST SOFT+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Overdrive
2 Device
3
4
5
6
Speaker
Presence
Output Level
Delay Time
7 Delay Feedback
Level
8 L/R Diffusion
0 – 100%
Display
Transistor/Vintage Tube/
Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz
Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/
Radio/Megaphone
0 – 20
0 – 100%
64th/3 – 4thx6
-63 – +63
Value
0 – 100
0 – 4
0 – 5
0 – 20
0 – 100
0 – 19
1 – 127
See Table Control table #14
9 Lag
10 Dry/Wet Balance
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127 (63ms)
1 – 127
1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –
127(63ms)
1 – 127
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●
11 Delay Mix
12
13
14
15
16
0 – 127 0 – 127
VIBE ROTOR (Variation, Insertion block)
No.
Parameter
1 Vibrate Speed
Display
0.00Hz – 39.7Hz
2 Vibrate Depth (AM) 0 – 127
3 Vibrate Depth (PM) 0 – 127
Value See Table Control
0 – 127 table #1
0 – 127
0 – 127
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz
4 – 40
7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet Balance
-12 – +12dB 52 – 76
D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 table #3
52 – 76
28 – 58 table #3
11
12
13
14 LFO Phase
Difference
15 Input Mode
16 Vibrate SW
-180 – +180deg
(resolution=3deg.) mono/stereo
OFF, ON
4 – 124
0 – 1
0 – 1 ●
NO EFFECT (Reverb, Chorus, Variation)
THRU (Insertion block)
Parameter Display No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
* Parameter 10 Dry/Wet only affects insertion type effects.
Value See Table Control
122
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Effect Data Assign Table
Table #1
LFO Frequency
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
51
52
53
54
55
47
48
49
50
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
35
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data Value Data Value
0
1
0.00
0.04
64
65
2.69
2.78
4
5
2
3
6
0.08
0.13
0.17
0.21
0.25
66
67
68
69
70
2.86
2.94
3.03
3.11
3.20
0.29
0.34
0.38
0.42
0.46
0.51
0.55
0.59
0.63
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
3.28
3.37
3.45
3.53
3.62
3.70
3.87
4.04
4.21
0.67
0.72
0.76
0.80
0.84
0.88
0.93
0.97
1.01
1.05
1.09
1.14
1.18
1.22
1.26
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
5.72
6.06
6.39
6.73
7.07
7.40
7.74
4.37
4.54
4.71
4.88
5.05
5.22
5.38
5.55
2.36
2.40
2.44
2.48
2.52
2.57
2.61
2.65
1.98
2.02
2.06
2.10
2.15
2.19
2.23
2.27
2.31
1.68
1.72
1.77
1.81
1.85
1.89
1.94
1.30
1.35
1.39
1.43
1.47
1.51
1.56
1.60
1.64
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
100
101
102
103
95
96
97
98
99
27.6
28.9
30.3
31.6
33.0
34.3
37.0
39.7
16.8
17.5
18.2
19.5
20.9
22.2
23.6
24.9
26.2
12.1
12.8
13.5
14.1
14.8
15.5
16.2
8.08
8.41
8.75
9.08
9.42
9.76
10.1
10.8
11.4
Table #2
Modulation Delay Offset
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
51
52
53
54
55
47
48
49
50
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
35
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data Value Data Value
0
1
0.0
0.1
64
65
6.4
6.5
4
5
2
3
6
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
66
67
68
69
70
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
39.0
40.6
42.2
43.7
45.3
46.9
48.4
50.0
24.9
26.5
28.0
29.6
31.2
32.8
34.3
35.9
37.5
14.4
15.5
17.1
18.6
20.2
21.8
23.3
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
11.1
12.2
13.3
Table #3
EQ Frequency
51
52
53
54
55
47
48
49
50
56
57
58
59
60
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
35
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data
0
1
4
5
2
3
6
4.5k
5.0k
5.6k
6.3k
7.0k
8.0k
9.0k
10.0k
11.0k
12.0k
14.0k
16.0k
18.0k
THRU (20.0k)
2.0k
2.2k
2.5k
2.8k
3.2k
3.6k
4.0k
700
800
900
1.0k
1.1k
1.2k
1.4k
1.6k
1.8k
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
45
50
56
63
70
80
90
100
110
Value
THRU (0)
22
25
28
32
36
40
Table #4
Reverb Time
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
51
52
53
54
55
47
48
49
50
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
35
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data Value Data Value
0
1
0.3
0.4
64
65
17.0
18.0
4
5
2
3
6
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
66
67
68
69
19.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
9.5
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
Table #5
Delay Time (200.0ms)
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
51
52
53
54
55
47
48
49
50
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
35
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data Value Data Value
0
1
0.1
1.7
64
65
100.8
102.4
4
5
2
3
6
3.2
4.8
6.4
8.0
9.5
66
67
68
69
70
104.0
105.6
107.1
108.7
110.3
11.1
12.7
14.3
15.8
17.4
19.0
20.6
22.1
23.7
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
111.9
113.4
115.0
116.6
118.2
119.7
121.3
122.9
124.4
25.3
26.9
28.4
30.0
31.6
33.2
34.7
36.3
37.9
39.5
41.0
42.6
44.2
45.7
47.3
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
138.6
140.2
141.8
143.3
144.9
146.5
148.1
126.0
127.6
129.2
130.7
132.3
133.9
135.5
137.0
88.2
89.8
91.4
93.0
94.5
96.1
97.7
99.3
74.1
75.7
77.2
78.8
80.4
81.9
83.5
85.1
86.7
63.1
64.6
66.2
67.8
69.4
70.9
72.5
48.9
50.5
52.0
53.6
55.2
56.8
58.3
59.9
61.5
111 174.8
112 176.4
113 178.0
114 179.5
115 181.1
116 182.7
117 184.3
118 185.8
119 187.4
120 189.0
121 190.6
122 192.1
123 193.7
124 195.3
125 196.9
126 198.4
127 200.0
95
96
97
98
99
149.6
151.2
152.8
154.4
155.9
100 157.5
101 159.1
102 160.6
103 162.2
104 163.8
105 165.4
106 166.9
107 168.5
108 170.1
109 171.7
110 173.2
CP300 Owner’s Manual
123
Effect Data Assign Table
Table #6
Room Size
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
51
52
53
54
55
47
48
49
50
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
35
3.9
4.0
4.2
4.3
4.5
4.6
4.8
2.6
2.8
2.9
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.5
3.7
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data Value Data Value
0
1
0.1
0.3
64
65
10.1
10.3
4
5
2
3
6
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
66
67
68
69
70
10.4
10.6
10.8
10.9
11.1
1.2
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
11.2
11.4
11.5
11.7
11.9
12.0
12.2
12.3
12.5
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
13.9
14.0
14.2
14.4
14.5
14.7
14.8
12.6
12.8
12.9
13.1
13.3
13.4
13.6
13.7
8.9
9.0
9.2
9.3
9.5
9.7
9.8
10.0
7.5
7.6
7.8
7.9
8.1
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.7
6.4
6.5
6.7
6.8
7.0
7.2
7.3
5.0
5.1
5.3
5.4
5.6
5.7
5.9
6.1
6.2
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
100
101
102
103
95
96
97
98
99
18.9
19.1
19.2
19.4
19.5
19.7
19.8
20.0
17.5
17.6
17.8
18.0
18.1
18.3
18.4
18.6
18.7
16.4
16.6
16.7
16.9
17.0
17.2
17.3
15.0
15.1
15.3
15.5
15.6
15.8
15.9
16.1
16.2
Table #7
Delay Time (400.0ms)
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
51
52
53
54
55
47
48
49
50
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
35
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data Value Data Value
0
1
0.1
3.2
64
65
201.6
204.8
4
5
2
3
6
6.4
9.5
12.7
15.8
19.0
66
67
68
69
70
207.9
211.1
214.2
217.4
220.5
22.1
25.3
28.4
31.6
34.7
37.9
41.0
44.2
47.3
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
223.7
226.8
230.0
233.1
236.3
239.4
242.6
245.7
248.9
50.5
53.6
56.8
59.9
63.1
66.2
69.4
72.5
75.7
78.8
82.0
85.1
88.3
91.4
94.6
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
277.2
280.3
283.5
286.6
289.8
292.9
296.1
252.0
255.2
258.3
261.5
264.6
267.7
270.9
274.0
97.7
100.9
104.0
107.2
110.3
95
96
97
98
99
299.2
302.4
305.5
308.7
311.8
113.5
100 315.0
116.6
101 318.1
119.8
102 321.3
122.9
103 324.4
126.1
104 327.6
129.2
105 330.7
132.4
106 333.9
135.5
107 337.0
138.6
108 340.2
141.8
109 343.3
144.9
110 346.5
148.1
111 349.6
151.2
112 352.8
154.4
113 355.9
157.5
114 359.1
160.7
115 362.2
163.8
116 365.4
167.0
117 368.5
170.1
118 371.7
173.3
119 374.8
176.4
120 378.0
179.6
121 381.1
182.7
122 384.3
185.9
123 387.4
189.0
124 390.6
192.2
125 393.7
195.3
126 396.9
198.5
127 400.0
Table #8
Compressor Attack Time
7
8
5
6
9
Data Value Data Value
0 1 10 12
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
5
11
12
13
14
14
16
18
20
8
9
6
7
10
15
16
17
18
19
23
26
30
35
40
Table #9
Compressor Release Time
Data Value Data Value
0
1
10
15
8
9
85
100
4
5
2
3
6
7
25
35
45
55
65
75
10
11
12
13
14
15
115
140
170
230
340
680
Table #10
Compressor Ratio
Data Value Data Value
0 1.0
4 5.0
1
2
3
1.5
2.0
3.0
5
6
7
7.0
10.0
20.0
Table #11
Reverb Width; Depth; Height
6.2
6.5
6.7
7.0
7.2
7.5
7.8
8.0
3.9
4.1
4.4
4.6
4.9
5.2
5.4
5.7
5.9
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
17
18
19
20
21
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
Data Value Data Value
0 0.5
64 17.6
1 0.8
65 17.9
4
5
2
3
1.0
1.3
1.5
1.8
66
67
68
69
18.2
18.5
18.8
19.1
2.0
2.3
2.6
2.8
3.1
3.3
3.6
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
19.4
19.7
20.0
20.2
20.5
20.8
21.1
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
81
82
83
84
85
77
78
79
80
24.2
24.5
24.9
25.2
25.5
25.8
26.1
26.5
21.4
21.7
22.0
22.4
22.7
23.0
23.3
23.6
23.9
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
26.8
27.1
27.5
27.8
28.1
28.5
28.8
29.2
29.5
29.9
30.2
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
61
62
63
42
43
44
45
37
38
39
40
41
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
14.5
14.8
15.1
15.4
15.6
15.9
16.2
16.5
12.6
12.9
13.1
13.4
13.7
14.0
14.2
16.8
17.1
17.3
10.2
10.4
10.7
11.0
11.2
11.5
11.8
12.1
12.3
8.3
8.6
8.8
9.1
9.4
9.6
9.9
Table #12
Wah Release Time
63
64
65
66
67
59
60
61
62
Data Value
52
53
10.0
15.0
54
55
56
57
58
25.0
35.0
45.0
55.0
65.0
75.0
85.0
100.0
115.0
140.0
170.0
230.0
340.0
680.0
Table #13
Sampling Freq Control
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
49
50
51
52
44
45
46
47
48
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
24
25
26
27
28
20
21
22
23
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
Data Value Data Value
0
1
44.1K
22.1K
64
65
678.0
668.0
4
5
2
3
14.7K
11.0K
8.8K
7.4K
66
67
68
69
658.0
649.0
639.0
630.0
6.3K
5.5K
4.9K
4.5K
4.0K
3.7K
3.4K
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
621.0
613.0
604.0
596.0
588.0
580.0
573.0
3.2K
2.9K
2.8K
2.6K
2.5K
2.3K
2.2K
2.1K
2.0K
1.92K
1.84K
1.76K
1.70K
1.63K
1.58K
1.52K
88
89
90
91
92
84
85
86
87
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
519.0
513.0
507.0
501.0
496.0
490.0
485.0
479.0
474.0
565.0
558.0
551.0
544.0
538.0
531.0
525.0
1.47K
1.42K
1.38K
1.34K
93
94
95
96
469.0
464.0
459.0
455.0
1.30K
1.26K
97
98
450.0
445.0
1.23K
99 441.0
1.19K
100 437.0
1.16K
101 432.0
1.13K
102 428.0
1.10K
103 424.0
1.08K
104 420.0
1.05K
105 416.0
1.03K
106 412.0
1.00K
107 408.0
980.0
108 405.0
959.0
109 401.0
938.0
110 397.0
919.0
111 394.0
900.0
112 390.0
882.0
113 387.0
865.0
114 383.0
848.0
115 380.0
832.0
116 377.0
817.0
117 374.0
802.0
118 371.0
788.0
119 368.0
774.0
120 364.0
760.0
121 361.0
747.0
122 359.0
735.0
123 356.0
723.0
124 353.0
711.0
125 350.0
700.0
126 347.0
689.0
127 345.0
Table #14
Tempo Delay
47 4thX34
48 4thX35
49 4thX36
50 4thX37
51 4thX38
52 4thX39
53 4thX40
54 4thX41
55 4thX42
56 4thX43
57 4thX44
58 4thX45
59 4thX46
60 4thX47
61 4thX48
62 4thX49
63 4thX50
31 4thX18
32 4thX19
33 4thX20
34 4thX21
35 4thX22
36 4thX23
37 4thX24
38 4thX25
39 4thX26
40 4thX27
41 4thX28
42 4thX29
43 4thX30
44 4thX31
45 4thX32
46 4thX33
11
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
Data Value Data Value
0
1
64th/3
64th.
64
65
4thX51
4thX52
4
5
2
3
6
32th
32th/3
32th.
16th
16th/3
66
67
68
69
70
4thX53
4thX54
4thX55
4thX56
4thX57
16th.
8th
8th/3
8th.
4th
4th/3
4th.
2nd
2nd/3
71 4thX58
72 4thX59
73 4thX60
74 4thX61
75 4thX62
76 4thX63
77 4thX64
16
17
18
19
2nd.
4thX4
4thX5
4thX6
20
21
4thX7
4thX8
22 4thX9
23 4thX10
24 4thX11
25 4thX12
26 4thX13
27 4thX14
28 4thX15
29 4thX16
30 4thX17
124
CP300 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers.
Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a suffix.
Also, "n" can freely be defined as any whole number. To enter data/values, refer to the table below.
Binary
0001 0010
0001 0011
0001 0100
0001 0101
0001 0110
0001 0111
0001 1000
0001 1001
0001 1010
0001 1011
0001 1100
0001 1101
0001 1110
0001 1111
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0011
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
0000 1000
0000 1001
0000 1010
0000 1011
0000 1100
0000 1101
0000 1110
0000 1111
0001 0000
0001 0001
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
30
31
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
Decimal Hexadecimal
0
1
00
01
2
3
4
5
02
03
04
05
0A
0B
0C
0D
06
07
08
09
1A
1B
1C
1D
16
17
18
19
1E
1F
12
13
14
15
0E
0F
10
11
Binary
0011 0010
0011 0011
0011 0100
0011 0101
0011 0110
0011 0111
0011 1000
0011 1001
0011 1010
0011 1011
0011 1100
0011 1101
0011 1110
0011 1111
0010 0000
0010 0001
0010 0010
0010 0011
0010 0100
0010 0101
0010 0110
0010 0111
0010 1000
0010 1001
0010 1010
0010 1011
0010 1100
0010 1101
0010 1110
0010 1111
0011 0000
0011 0001
58
59
60
61
54
55
56
57
62
63
50
51
52
53
46
47
48
49
42
43
44
45
38
39
40
41
Decimal Hexadecimal
32
33
20
21
34
35
36
37
22
23
24
25
2A
2B
2C
2D
26
27
28
29
3A
3B
3C
3D
36
37
38
39
3E
3F
32
33
34
35
2E
2F
30
31
Binary
0101 0010
0101 0011
0101 0100
0101 0101
0101 0110
0101 0111
0101 1000
0101 1001
0101 1010
0101 1011
0101 1100
0101 1101
0101 1110
0101 1111
0100 0000
0100 0001
0100 0010
0100 0011
0100 0100
0100 0101
0100 0110
0100 0111
0100 1000
0100 1001
0100 1010
0100 1011
0100 1100
0100 1101
0100 1110
0100 1111
0101 0000
0101 0001
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
94
95
82
83
84
85
78
79
80
81
74
75
76
77
70
71
72
73
Decimal Hexadecimal
64
65
40
41
66
67
68
69
42
43
44
45
4A
4B
4C
4D
46
47
48
49
5A
5B
5C
5D
56
57
58
59
5E
5F
52
53
54
55
4E
4F
50
51
Binary
0111 0010
0111 0011
0111 0100
0111 0101
0111 0110
0111 0111
0111 1000
0111 1001
0111 1010
0111 1011
0111 1100
0111 1101
0111 1110
0111 1111
0110 0000
0110 0001
0110 0010
0110 0011
0110 0100
0110 0101
0110 0110
0110 0111
0110 1000
0110 1001
0110 1010
0110 1011
0110 1100
0110 1101
0110 1110
0110 1111
0111 0000
0111 0001
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
Decimal Hexadecimal
96
97
60
61
98
99
100
101
62
63
64
65
6A
6B
6C
6D
66
67
68
69
7A
7B
7C
7D
76
77
78
79
7E
7F
72
73
74
75
6E
6F
70
71
• Except the table above, for example 144-159 (decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001 1111 (binary) denotes the Note On Message for each channel
(1-16). 176-191/BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 denotes the Control Change Message for each channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100
1111 denotes the Program Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the start of a System Exclusive Message.
247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message.
• aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address contains High, Mid, and Low.
• bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.
• ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.
• ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.
CP300 Owner’s Manual
125
MIDI Data Format
MIDI CHANNEL MESSAGE (1)
MIDI Events
Key Off
Key On
Control
Change
Mode
Message
Program
Change
Status byte
Status
8nH
9nH
(n: Channel
Number)
(n: Channel
Number)
BnH
Data kk kk
0
1
5
6
7
1st Data byte
(HEX)
(00H)
(01H)
(05H)
(06H)
(07H)
10 (0AH)
11 (0BH)
32 (20H)
38 (26H)
64 (40H)
65 (41H)
66 (42H)
67 (43H)
72 (48H)
73 (49H)
Parameter
Key no. (0 – 127)
Key no. (0 – 127)
Bank Select MSB
Modulation
Portamento Time
Data Entry MSB
Main Volume
Panpot
Expression
Bank Select LSB
Data Entry LSB
Sustain (Damper)
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft Pedal
Release Time
Attack Time
Data
2nd Data byte
(HEX) Parameter vv vv
0
64
126
127
(00H)
(40H)
(7EH)
(7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
Velocity (0 – 127)
Key On: vv=1 – 127
Key Off: vv=0
Normal
SFX Voice
SFX kit
Drum kit
Data
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
REC
Recorded from panel
Ø Ø Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
(Keyboard)
Ø
(Voice)
Ø
(Modulation Wheel)
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
71 (47H) Harmonic Content 0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
Data
Data
Data
L64
Data
Data
Data
Data
0...63, 64...127
(OFF, ON)
0...63, 64...127
(OFF, ON)
0...63, 64...127
(OFF, ON)
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
74 (4AH) Brightness 0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
-64...0...+63
84 (54H) Portamento Control 0 – 127
91 (5BH)
Effect1 Depth
(Reverb Send Level)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
Key no. (0 – 127)
(00H...
7FH)
Data
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
˛
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
˛
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
˛
˛
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(Pedal1 – 4,
Modulation Wheel)
Ø
(Voice)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(Pedal1 – 4)
˛
Ø
(Pedal1 – 4)
Ø
(Pedal1 – 4)
Ø
(Pedal4, Modulation
Wheel, VOICE EDIT)
˛
˛
Ø
(Pedal4, Modulation
Wheel, VOICE EDIT)
˛
Ø
(Pedal4, Modulation
Wheel, VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(Pedal4, Modulation
Wheel, VOICE EDIT)
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
93 (5DH)
Effect3 Depth
(Chorus Send Level)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
Data
94 (5EH)
96 (60H)
97
98
99
(61H)
(62H)
(63H)
Effect4 Depth
(Variation Send Level)
0 – 127
RPN Increment
RPN Decrement
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
–
–
0 – 127
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
–
–
(00H...
7FH)
(00H...
7FH)
Data
The data byte is ignored.
The data byte is ignored.
Data
Data
100 (64H) RPN LSB 0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
Data
101 (65H)
0 – 119
(00H...77H)
RPN MSB
(Assignable)
0 – 127
(00H...
7FH)
0 – 127
(00H...7FH)
Data
Data
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(Pedal4, Modulation
Wheel)
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
(n: Channel
Number)
120 (78H) All Sound Off
121 (79H) Reset All Controllers
123 (7BH)
BnH
124 (7CH)
125 (7DH)
126 (7EH)
CnH
(n: Channel
Number)
127 (7FH) pp
(00H...
7FH)
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
Voice number
(0 – 127)
0
0
0
0
0
0 – 16
0
–
(00H)
(00H)
(00H)
(00H)
(00H)
(00H...
10H)
(00H)
–
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
(All manually played parts)
˛
Ø
(All manually played parts)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(Voice)
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
126
CP300 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
MIDI Events
Status byte
Status Data
1st Data byte
(HEX) Parameter
Channel After
Touch
DnH
(n: Channel
Number)
Polyphonic
After Touch
Pitch Bend
Change
Realtime
Message
AnH
EnH
(n: Channel
Number)
(n: Channel
Number)
F8H MIDI Clock
FAH Start
FBH Continue
FCH Stop
FEH
FFH
Active
Sense
System
Reset
–
–
–
–
– vv kk cc
(00H...
7FH)
(00H...
7FH)
(00H...
7FH)
–
Data
Key no. (0 – 127)
LSB
–
–
–
–
–
–
2nd Data byte
Data (HEX) Parameter
– vv dd
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(00H...
7FH)
(00H...
7FH)
–
Data
MSB
–
–
–
–
–
–
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø Ø
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(Pedal4, Modulation
Wheel)
Ø ˛
REC
Recorded from panel
˛
Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛
Ø Ø
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø ˛ Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
(Pitch Bend Wheel)
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø ˛ ˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛ ˛ ˛
MIDI CHANNEL MESSAGE (2)
Parameters controlled by NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Numbers)
NRPN Data Entry
MSB LSB MSB LSB
Parameter Data Range
01H 08H mmH – Vibrato Rate
01H 09H mmH – Vibrato Depth
01H
01H
0AH mmH
20H mmH
– Vibrato Delay
–
Low Pass Filter Cutoff
Frequency mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)
01H 21H mmH – Low Pass Filter Resonance mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)
01H 30H mmH – EQ BASS mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)
01H 31H mmH – EQ TREBLE
01H 34H mmH – EQ BASS Frequency mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) mm: 04H-28H (32...2.0k[Hz])
01H 35H mmH – EQ TREBLE Frequency
01H 63H mmH – EG Attack Time
01H 64H mmH – EG Decay Time
01H 66H mmH – EG Release mm: 1CH-3AH (500...16.0k[Hz]) mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)
14H
15H
16H rrH rrH rrH mmH mmH mmH
–
–
–
Drum Low Pass Filter Cutoff
Frequency rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)
Drum Low Pass Filter
Resonance
Drum EG Attack Rate rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)
17H
18H
19H
1AH
1CH
1DH
1EH
1FH rrH rrH rrH rrH rrH rrH rrH rrH mmH mmH mmH mmH mmH mmH mmH mmH
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Drum EG Decay Rate
Drum Pitch Coarse
Drum Pitch Fine
Drum Level
Drum Pan
Drum Reverb Send Level
Drum Chorus Send Level
Drum Variation Send Level rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-7FH (0...127) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H, 01H-40H-7FH (RND, L63...C...R63) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-7FH (0...127) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-7FH (0...127) rr: drum instrument note number mm: 00H-7FH (0...127)
(Variation Connection = SYSTEM) mm: 00H, 01H-7FH (OFF, ON)
(Variation Connection = INSERTION)
NRPN MSB: 14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a drum Voice.
Data Entry LSB: Ignored.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
Ø ˛ ˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Parameters controlled by RPN (Registered Parameter Numbers)
RPN Data Entry
Parameter Data Range
MSB LSB MSB LSB
00H 00H mmH – Pitch Bend Sensitivity
00H 01H mmH llH Fine Tune
00H 02H mmH – Coarse Tune
7FH 7FH – – Null mm: 00H-18H (0...+24[semitones]) mm l: 00H 00H -100 [cent]
...
mm ll: 40H 00H 0 [cent]
...
mm ll: 7FH 7FH 100 [cent] mm: 28H-40H-58H (-24...0...+24 [semitones])
–
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛ Ø ˛ ˛
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Ø Ø
Ø
(All manually played parts)
MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
REC
Recorded from panel
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø ˛ Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(All manually played parts)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
˛
CP300 Owner’s Manual
127
MIDI Data Format
MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE
*Not Received when Receive Parameter SysEx is set to off.
*Not transmitted when Transmit Parameter SysEx is set to off.
MIDI Parameter Change table (XG SYSTEM)
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter
00 00
TOTAL SIZE
04
05
06
7D
7E
7F
00
01
02
03
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
07
00-0F
00-0F
00-0F
00-0F
MASTER TUNE
00-7F MASTER VOLUME
00-7F MASTER ATTENUATOR
28-58 TRANSPOSE
N DRUM SETUP RESET
00 XG SYSTEM ON
00 ALL PARAMETER RESET
Description
-102.4...0...+102.3 [cent]
1st bit 3-0
→
bit 15-12
2nd bit 3-0
→
bit 11-8
3rd bit 3-0
→
bit 7-4
4th bit 3-0
→
bit 3-0
0...127
0...127
-24...0...+24 [semitones]
N: Drum setup number
00=XG system ON
00=ON
XG Default
(H)
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
REC
Recorded from panel
*Panel setting value
7F
00
40
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM INFORMATION)
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter Description
01 00
00
...
0D
0E
0F
E
1
1
20-7F
...
20-7F
Model Name 1
...
Model Name 14
NOT USED
NOT USED
TOTAL SIZE 10
Transmitted in response to Dump Request. Not received.
32...127 (ASCII CHARACTER)
...
32...127 (ASCII CHARACTER)
MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT1)
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
REC
Recorded from panel
– – – ˛ ˛ Ø ˛
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter Description
02 01 00
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00-7F
00-7F
REVERB TYPE MSB
REVERB TYPE LSB
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 1
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 2
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 3
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 4
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 5
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 6
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 7
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
09
0A
1
1
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 8
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 9 :
:
0B
TOTAL SIZE
0C
0D
1
1
1
0E
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 10
00-7F REVERB RETURN
01-7F REVERB PAN
:
-
∞ dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127)
L63...C...R63
XG Default
(H)
01 (=HALL1)
00
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
40
40
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø ˛
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
02 01 10
11
12
13
14
15
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 11
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 12
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 13
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 14
1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 15
1
06
00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 16
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Depends on
Reverb type
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
Ø
(*Depends on Reverb type)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
128
CP300 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter Description
02 01 20
22
23
24
25
26
27
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
00-7F
00-7F
CHORUS TYPE MSB
CHORUS TYPE LSB
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 1
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 2
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 3
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 4
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 5
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 6
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
28
29
2A
2B
TOTAL SIZE
2C
2D
2E
1
1
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 7
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 8 :
:
1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 9 :
1
1
1
1
0F
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 10 :
00-7F CHORUS RETURN
01-7F CHORUS PAN
-
∞ dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127)
L63...C...R63
00-7F SEND CHORUS TO REVERB -
∞ dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127)
XG Default
(H)
41 (=CHORUS1)
00
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
40
40
00
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø ˛
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
02 01 30
31
32
33
34
35
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 12
1
1
06
1
1
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 13
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 14
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 15
00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 16
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Depends on
Chorus Type
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Chorus Type)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Address
(H)
02 01 40
42
44
46
48
4A
4C
4E
50
52
54
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
TOTAL SIZE
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
1
1
1
1
1
21
2
1
1
1
1
1
Size
(H)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
Data
(H)
Parameter
00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB
00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB
00-7F VARIATION RETURN
01-7F VARIATION PAN
00-7F SEND VARIATION TO REVERB
00-7F SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS
00-01 VARIATION CONNECTION
00-7F VARIATION PART NUMBER
00-7F MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
Description
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
-
∞ dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127)
L63...C...R63
-
∞ dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127)
-
∞ dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127)
INSERTION, SYSTEM
Reception: Part1...16 (0...15)
Transmission: Part1...16 (0...15)
OFF (127)
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
XG Default
(H)
Song
MIDI Reception
(respond/ignore)
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
05 (=DELAY L,
C, R)
00
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
40
40
00
00
00
Ø
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
7F
40
40
40
40
40
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
MIDI Transmission
(generated data)
Panel (main generation method)
Song Midi
REC
Recorded from panel
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
02 01 70
71
72
73
74
TOTAL SIZE
75
1
1
1
1
1
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 12
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15
1
06
00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 16
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Depends on
Variation Type
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Variation Type)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
CP300 Owner’s Manual
129
MIDI Data Format
MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI EQ)
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter
02 40 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
0C
0D
0E
0F
08
09
0A
0B
10
11
12
13
14
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
00-04 EQ TYPE
34-4C EQ GAIN 1
04-28 EQ FREQUENCY 1
01-78 EQ Q 1
00-01 EQ SHAPE 1
34-4C EQ GAIN 2
0E-36 EQ FREQUENCY 2
01-78 EQ Q 2
NOT USED
34-4C EQ GAIN 3
0E-36 EQ FREQUENCY 3
01-78 EQ Q 3
NOT USED
34-4C EQ GAIN4
0E-36 EQ FREQUENCY 4
01-78 EQ Q 4
NOT USED
34-4C EQ GAIN 5
1C-3A EQ FREQUENCY 5
01-78 EQ Q 5
00-01 EQ SHAPE 5
Description flat, jazz, pops, rock, classic
-12...0...+12 [dB]
32...2.0k [Hz]
0.1...12.0
shelving, peaking
-12...0...+12 [dB]
100...10.0k [Hz]
0.1...12.0
-12...0...+12 [dB]
100...10.0k [Hz]
0.1...12.0
-12...0...+12 [dB]
100...10.0k [Hz]
0.1...12.0
-12...0...+12 [dB]
0.5k...16.0k [Hz]
0.1...12.0
shelving, peaking
*MULTI EQ is not reset by the
XG System On.
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø
Ø
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
–
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT2)
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter
03 n
05
06
07
08
00
02
03
04
09
0A
0B
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
00-7F
00-7F
INSERTION EFFECT TYPE MSB
INSERTION EFFECT TYPE LSB
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 1
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 2
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 3
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 4
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 5
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 6
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 7
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 8
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 9
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 10
0C
TOTAL SIZE
0D
0E
0F
10
11
1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PART NUMBER
1
1
1
1
1
12
00-7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
00-7F AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH
24
TOTAL SIZE
25
20
21
22
23
38
3A
3C
3E
30
32
34
36
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 11
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 12
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 13
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 14
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 15
00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 16
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 1 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 1 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 2 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 2 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 3 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 3 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 4 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 4 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 5 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 5 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 6 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 6 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 7 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 7 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 8 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 8 LSB
Description
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Reception: Part1...16 (0...15)
Transmission: Part1...16 (0...15)
OFF (127)
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
˛
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
(Voice)
Ø ˛ Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Refer to Effect Parameter List
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
130
CP300 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
40
42
2
2
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 9 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 9 LSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 10 MSB
INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 10 LSB :
:
:
: Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
Ø
(*Depends on Insertion Type)
˛
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
TOTAL SIZE 14
The EFFECT2 Parameter cannot be reset to its factory setting with XG SYSTEM ON.
The second byte of the address is considered as an Insertion effect number.
n: insertion effect number (n = 0 – 2)
For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02 – 0B will be received and the Parameters for Address 30 – 42 will not be received.
For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30 – 42 will be received and the Parameters for Address 02 – 0B will not be received.
When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is received the
Parameters for Address 02 – 0B will not be received.
˛
Ø
MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)
Address
(H)
08 nn 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
TOTAL SIZE
0D
22
23
24
25
1E
1F
20
21
26
27
28
1A
1B
1C
1D
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
0E
0F
10
11
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
29
1
1
1
1
2
Data
(H)
Parameter
00-20 NOT USED
00-7F BANK SELECT MSB
00-7F BANK SELECT LSB
00-7F PROGRAM NUMBER
00-0F,
7F
Rcv CHANNEL
00-01 MONO/POLY MODE
00-02
SAME NOTE NUMBER KEY ON
ASSIGN
00-03 PART MODE
28-58 NOTE SHIFT
00-0F
00-0F
DETUNE
00-7F VOLUME
00-7F VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH
Description
00-7F VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET 0...127
00-7F PAN
00-7F NOTE LIMIT LOW
00-7F NOTE LIMIT HIGH
00-7F DRY LEVEL
00-7F CHORUS SEND
00-7F REVERB SEND
00-7F VARIATION SEND
00-7F VIBRATO RATE
00-7F VIBRATO DEPTH
00-7F VIBRATO DELAY
00-7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
00-7F FILTER RESONANCE
00-7F EG ATTACK TIME
00-7F EG DECAY TIME
00-7F EG RELEASE TIME
28-58 MW PITCH CONTROL
RND, L63...C...R63
C-2...G8
C-2...G8
0...127
0...127
0...127
0...127
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-24...0...+24 [semitones]
00-7F MW LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL
00-7F MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL
00-7F MW LFO PMOD DEPTH
00-7F MW LFO FMOD DEPTH
-9600...0...+9450 [cent]
-100...0...+100 [%]
0...127
0...127
00-7F MW LFO AMOD DEPTH
28-58 BEND PITCH CONTROL
0...127
-24...0...+24 [semitones]
00-7F BEND LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent]
00-7F BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL -100...0...+100 [%]
00-7F BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH
00-7F BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH
00-7F BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH
0...127
0...127
0...127
XG Default
(H)
0...127
0...127
1...128
1...16, OFF
MONO, POLY
SINGLE, MULTI, INST
(for Drum)
NORMAL, DRUM,
DRUMS1...2
-24...0...+24 [semitones]
-12.8...0...+12.7 [Hz]
1st bit3-0
→
bit7-4
2nd bit3-0
→
bit3-0
0...127
0...127
part10=7F, other parts=00
00
00
Part No.
01
01 part10=02, other parts=00
40
08 00
64
40
40
00
42
40
40
40
40
0A
00
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
00
28
00
40
40
00
7F
7F
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
˛
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
˛
Keyboard
˛
Panel
(main generation method)
˛
Song Midi
˛ ˛
REC
Recorded from panel
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(Drum Voice)
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
38
39
3A
3B
41
34
35
36
30
31
32
33
37
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00-01 Rcv PITCH BEND
00-01 Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH (CAT)
00-01 Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE
00-01 Rcv CONTROL CHANGE
00-01 Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH (PAT)
00-01 Rcv NOTE MESSAGE
00-01 Rcv RPN
00-01 Rcv NRPN
00-01 Rcv MODULATION
00-01 Rcv VOLUME
00-01 Rcv PAN
00-01 Rcv EXPRESSION
00-01 Rcv HOLD1
00-01 Rcv PORTAMENTO
00-01 Rcv SOSTENUTO
00-01 Rcv SOFT PEDAL
00-01 Rcv BANK SELECT
00-7F SCALE TUNING C
Description
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
-63...0...+63 [cent]
XG Default
(H)
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
XGmode=01,
GMmode=00
40
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
CP300 Owner’s Manual
131
MIDI Data Format
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter Description
46
47
48
49
42
43
44
45
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00-7F SCALE TUNING C#
00-7F SCALE TUNING D
00-7F SCALE TUNING D#
00-7F SCALE TUNING E
00-7F SCALE TUNING F
00-7F SCALE TUNING F#
00-7F SCALE TUNING G
00-7F SCALE TUNING G#
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
4A
4B
1
1
00-7F SCALE TUNING A
00-7F SCALE TUNING A#
-63...0...+63 [cent]
-63...0...+63 [cent]
4C
TOTAL SIZE
69
6A
6B
6C
65
66
67
68
6D
6E
61
62
63
64
5D
5E
5F
60
59
5A
5B
5C
55
56
57
58
51
52
53
54
4D
4E
4F
50
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3F
00-7F SCALE TUNING B -63...0...+63 [cent]
28-58 CAT PITCH CONTROL -24...0...+24 [semitones]
00-7F CAT LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent]
00-7F CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
00-7F CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
-100...0...+100 [%]
0...127
00-7F CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
00-7F CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH
28-58 PAT PITCH CONTROL
00-7F PAT LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL
0...127
0...127
-24...0...+24 [semitones]
-9600...0...+9450 [cent]
00-7F PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
00-7F PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
00-7F PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
00-7F PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH
00-5F AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER
28-58 AC1 PITCH CONTROL
00-7F AC1 LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL
00-7F AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
-100...0...+100 [%]
0...127
0...127
0...127
0...95
-24...0...+24 [semitones]
-9600...0...+9450 [cent]
-100...0...+100 [%]
00-7F AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH
00-7F AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH
00-7F AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH
00-5F AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER
28-58 AC2 PITCH CONTROL
00-7F AC2 LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL
00-7F AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
00-7F AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH
00-7F AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH
00-7F AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH
00-01 PORTAMENTO SWITCH
00-7F PORTAMENTO TIME
00-7F PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
00-7F PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
00-7F PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
00-7F PITCH EG RELEASE TIME
01-7F VELOCITY LIMIT LOW
01-7F VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH
0...127
0...127
0...127
0...95
-24...0...+24 [semitones]
-9600...0...+9450 [cent]
-100...0...+100 [%]
0...127
0...127
0...127
OFF, ON
0...127
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
1...127
1...127
70
71
72
TOTAL SIZE
73
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
00-7F EQ BASS GAIN
1
04
00-7F EQ TREBLE GAIN
-12dB...+12dB
-12dB...+12dB
74
75
76
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
04-28 EQ BASS FREQUENCY 32...2.0k[Hz]
77 1 1C-3A EQ TREBLE FREQUENCY 500...16.0k[Hz]
7C
7D
7E
7F
78
79
7A
7B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
TOTAL SIZE 0C nn = PART NUMBER
If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the part, the following parameters are ineffective.
• BANK SELECT LSB
• MONO/POLY MODE
• SCALE TUNING
• PORTAMENTO
• PITCH EG
• FILTER MODULATION DEPTH (FMOD DEPTH)
• AMPLITUDE MODULATION DEPTH (AMOD DEPTH)
–
–
0C
36
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
00
00
00
00
01
7F
40
40
40
00
00
00
00
11
10
40
40
40
40
00
00
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
00
XG Default
(H)
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
–
–
40
40
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
–
–
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
132
CP300 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP)
Address
(H)
Size
(H)
Data
(H)
Parameter
3n rr 00
01
02
03
04
1
1
1
1
1
00-7F PITCH COARSE
00-7F PITCH FINE
00-7F LEVEL
00-7F ALTERNATE GROUP
00-7F PAN
05
TOTAL SIZE
0C
0D
0E
0F
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
1 00-7F REVERB SEND
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
00-7F CHORUS SEND
00-7F VARIATION SEND
00-01 KEY ASSIGN
00-01 Rcv NOTE OFF
00-01 Rcv NOTE ON
00-7F
LOW PASS FILTER CUTOFF
FREQUENCY
00-7F LOW PASS FILTER RESONANCE
00-7F EG ATTACK RATE
00-7F EG DECAY1 RATE
00-7F EG DECAY2 RATE
Description
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63 [cent]
0...127
OFF, 1...127
RND, L63...C...R63
0...127
0...127
0...127
SINGLE, MULTI
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
-64...0...+63
XG Default
(H)
40
40
Depends on the note
Depends on the note
Depends on the note
Depends on the note
Depends on the note
7F
00
Depends on the note
01
40
40
40
40
40
MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Panel
(main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
REC
Recorded from panel
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00-7F EQ BASS GAIN
00-7F EQ TREBLE GAIN
NOT USED
NOT USED
04-28 EQ BASS FREQUENCY
1C-3A EQ TREBLE FREQUENCY
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
-12...+12 [dB]
-12...+12 [dB]
32...2.0k [Hz]
500...16.0k [Hz]
–
–
–
–
–
–
0C
36
–
–
40
40
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
˛
˛
TOTAL SIZE 0E n: Drum Setup Number (0-1) rr: note number (0D-5B)
In the following cases, the PF-500 will initialize all Drum Setups.
XG SYSTEM ON received
GM SYSTEM ON received
DRUM SETUP RESET received (only when in XG mode)
When a part to which a Drum Setup is assigned receives a program change, the assigned Drum Setup will be initialized.
If the same Drum Setup is assigned to two or more parts, changes in Drum Setup parameters (including program changes) will apply to all parts to which it is assigned.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
–
–
˛
˛
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ø
Ø
–
–
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
System Exclusive Messages (1)
*Not Received when Receive Parameter SysEx is set to off.
*Not transmitted when Transmit Parameter SysEx is set to off.
System Exclusive Messages (Universal Realtime messages)
MIDI Event Data Format
MIDI Reception
(effective or not for each part)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
Master
Volume
F0 7F XN 04 01 SS TT F7
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01111111
0xxxnnnn
00000100
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111
7F = Universal Real Time
XN = When N is received N = 0-F, whichever is received. X = ignored
04 = Sub-ID #1 = Device Control Message
01 = Sub-ID #2 = Master Volume
SS = Volume LSB
TT = Volume MSB
F7 = End of Exclusive
Ø ˛ ˛
MIDI Reception
(affecting the panel)
˛
MIDI Transmission
(generated data)
Panel (main generation method)
Song
˛
˛
(Output as XG
Master Volume)
˛
Ø: Available
REC
Midi
Recorded from panel
˛
System Exclusive Messages (Universal Non Realtime messages)
MIDI Event Data Format
MIDI Reception
(effective or not for each part)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
GM1
System On
F0 7E XN 09 01
11110000
01111110
F0 = Exclusive status
0xxxnnnn
00001001
7E = Universal Non-Real Time
XN = When N is received N = 0-F, whichever is received. X = ignored
09 = Sub-ID #1 = General MIDI Message
00000001
11110111
01 = Sub-ID #2 = General MIDI On
F7 = End of Exclusive
Ø ˛ ˛
MIDI Reception
(affecting the panel)
Ø
(VOICE EDIT
Reverb Type
Chorus Type)
MIDI Transmission
(generated data)
Panel (main generation method)
Song
˛ Ø
REC
Midi
Recorded from panel
˛ Ø
CP300 Owner’s Manual
133
MIDI Data Format
System Exclusive Messages (2)
*Not received when the Receive Parameter SysEx is set to off.
*Not transmitted when the Transmit Parameter SysEx is set to off.
System Exclusive Messages (XG)
MIDI Event Data Format
MIDI Reception
(effective or not for each part)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
MIDI Reception
(affecting the panel)
MIDI Transmission
(generated data)
Panel (main generation method)
Song Midi
XG Parameter
Change
XG Bulk Dump
XG Parameter
Request
XG Dump
Request
F0 43 1n 4C hh mm ll dd ... F7
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
43 = YAMAHA ID
1n = Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit), n = 0-F (when receive)
4C = Model ID
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll hh = Address High mm = Address Mid ll = Address Low dd = Data 0ddddddd
:
11110111 F7
:
= End of Exclusive
F0 43 0n 4C aa bb hh mm ll dd ... dd cc F7
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0bbbbbbb
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
0n = Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit), n = 0-F (when receive)
4C = Model ID aa = Byte Count MSB bb = Byte Count LSB
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
0ccccccc
11110111 hh = Address High mm = Address Mid ll = Address Low dd = Data
: dd = Data cc = Checksum
F7 = End of Exclusive
F0 43 3n 4C hh mm ll F7
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01000011
0011nnnn
01001100
43 = YAMAHA ID
3n = Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit), n = 0-F (when receive)
4C = Model ID
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
11110111 hh = Address High mm = Address Mid ll = Address Low
F7 = End of Exclusive
F0 43 2n 4C hh mm ll dd F7
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01000011
0010nnnn
01001100
43 = YAMAHA ID
2n = Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit), n = 0-F (when receive)
4C = Model ID
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
11110111 hh = Address High mm = Address Mid ll = Address Low
F7 = End of Exclusive
Ø
*Refer to Parameter Change
Table
Ø
*Refer to Parameter Change
Table
Ø
*Refer to Parameter Change
Table
Ø
*Refer to Parameter Change
Table
–
–
–
–
Ø
*Refer to Parameter
Change Table
˛
Ø
*Refer to Parameter
Change Table
˛
˛
˛
134
CP300 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Data Format
System Exclusive Message (Preset Voice)
MIDI Event Data Format
MIDI Reception
(effective or not for each part)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
MIDI Reception
(affecting the panel)
MIDI Transmission
(generated data)
Panel (main generation method)
Song Midi
String
Resonance
Depth
Sustain
Sampling
Depth
Key-off
Sampling
Depth
Soft Pedal
Depth
F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 02 dd F7
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01000011
01110011
43 = YAMAHA ID
73 = Clavinova ID
00000001
01010000
00010001
01 = Model ID (Clavinova common ID)
50 = Sub ID
11 = Sub ID
0n = Channel (00 – 0F) 0000nnnn
00000010
0ddddddd
11110111
02 = Sub ID (String Resonance Depth) dd = Depth (00 – 48)
F7 = End of Exclusive
F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 03 dd F7
11110000
01000011
01110011
00000001
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
73 = Clavinova ID
01 = Model ID (Clavinova common ID)
01010000
00010001
0000nnnn
50 = Sub ID
11 = Sub ID
0n = Channel (00 – 0F)
03 = Sub ID (Sustain Sampling Depth) 00000011
0ddddddd
11110111 dd = Depth (00 – 48)
F7 = End of Exclusive
F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 04 dd F7
11110000
01000011
01110011
00000001
01010000
00010001
0000nnnn
00000100
0ddddddd
11110111
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
73 = Clavinova ID
01 = Model ID (Clavinova common ID)
50 = Sub ID
11 = Sub ID
0n = Channel (00 – 0F)
04 = Sub ID (Key-off Sampling Depth) dd = Depth (00 – 50)
F7 = End of Exclusive
F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 05 dd F7
11110000
01000011
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
01110011
00000001
01010000
00010001
73 = Clavinova ID
01 = Model ID (Clavinova common ID)
50 = Sub ID
11 = Sub ID
0000nnnn
00000101
0ddddddd
11110111
0n = Channel (00 – 0F)
05 = Sub ID (Soft Pedal Depth) dd = Depth (00 – 7F)
F7 = End of Exclusive
*For each Depth value, the reset value is 40H = Voice parameter.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
˛
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
˛
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
˛
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
(Other Setting)
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
System Exclusive Message (Other)
MIDI Event Data Format
MIDI Master
Tuning
F0 43 1n 27 30 00 00 Om Ol cc F7
11110000
01000011
F0 = Exclusive status
43 = YAMAHA ID
0001nnnn
00100111
00110000
00000000
1n n = always 0 (when transmit), n = 0-F (when receive)
27 = Model ID of TG100
30 = Address High
00 = Address Mid
00000000
0000mmmm
0000llll
0ccccccc
11110111
00 = Address Low
0m = Master Tune MSB
0l = Master Tune LSB cc = irrelevant
F7 = End of Exclusive
MIDI Reception
(effective or not for each part)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
MIDI Reception
(affecting the panel)
MIDI Transmission
(generated data)
Panel (main generation method)
Song Midi
Ø
Ø
(Other Setting)
˛ Ø ˛
CP300 Owner’s Manual
135
MIDI Data Format
System Exclusive Message (Data Bulk )
MIDI Event Data Format
Data Bulk
Dump
F0 43 0n xx yy zz aa bb cc dd hh mm ll dd ... dd sum F7
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01000011
0000nnnn
43 = YAMAHA ID
0n = Device Number n = always 0
0xxxxxxx
0zzzzzzz
0aaaaaaa
0bbbbbbb
7F = Model ID High
04 = Model ID Low aa = Byte Count MSB bb = Byte Count LSB
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
0ccccccc cc = The number of available MSB dd = The number of available LSB hh = Address High mm = Address Mid ll = Address Low dd = Data
: dd = Data cc = Checksum
Function
Bulk Header
Address High
10
Address Mid
00
Address Low
00
Current
(End)
Performance
(End)
Voice Setting
(End)
Bulk Footer
20
30
40
11
00
00
7F
00
00
7F
00
00
7F
00
:
7F
00
00
7F
00
:
7F
–
–
–
MIDI Reception
(effective or not for each part)
Song
Main
Layer
Left
Left Layer
Keyboard
MIDI Reception
(affecting the panel)
MIDI Transmission
(generated data)
Panel (main generation method)
Song Midi
–
–
–
Ø
–
–
–
–
Ø
–
–
–
–
Ø
(Other than the Data Bulk)
Ø
(Performance)
–
(Voice Setting)
Ø
(Bulk)
Ø
(Bulk Current)
Ø
(Bulk
Performance)
Ø
(Bulk Voice)
– Ø
(Bulk)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(Bulk Request)
Ø
(Bulk Request)
Ø
(Bulk Request)
Ø
(Bulk Request)
Ø
(Bulk Request)
Data Bulk
Dump Request
F0 43 2n xx yy zz hh mm ll F7
11110000 F0 = Exclusive status
01000011
0000nnnn
0xxxxxxx
43 = YAMAHA ID
2n = Device Number n = always 0
7F = Model ID High
0zzzzzzz
0hhhhhhh
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
04 = Model ID Low hh = Address High mm = Address Mid ll = Address Low
Function
Current,
Performance,
Voice Setting
Address High
00
Address Mid
00
Address Low
00 – – – – ˛ ˛ ˛
136
CP300 Owner’s Manual
MIDI Implementation Chart
YAMAHA [ Stage Piano ]
CP300 MIDI Implementation Chart
Function...
Transmitted
Basic
Channel
Mode
Default
Changed
1 - 16
1 - 16
Default
Messages
Altered
3
˛
**************
Note
Number : True voice
0 - 127
**************
Velocity
After
Touch
Note ON
Note OFF
Ø
9nH,v=1-127
˛
9nH,v=0
Key's
Ch's
˛
˛
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
0,32
1
5
7,10,11
6,38
64,66,67
65
71,74
72,73
84,94
91,93
96-97
98-99
100-101
1-119
Prog
Change : True #
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
(Assignable)
Ø
0 - 127
**************
System Exclusive
Ø
Common : Song Pos.
: Song Sel.
: Tune
˛
˛
˛
System : Clock
Real Time : Commands
Ø
Ø
: All Sound Off
Aux : Reset All Cntrls
: Local ON/OFF
Mes- : All Notes OFF sages: Active Sense
: Reset
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Note : *1= Transmission only
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
(120,126,127)
(121)
˛
Ø
(122)
(123-125)
Ø
˛
Date :1-NOV-2005
Version : 1.0
Recognized Remarks
1 - 16
1 - 16
3
˛
˛
0 - 127
0 - 127
Ø
9nH,v=1-127
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
0 - 24 semi
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
0 - 127
Bank Select
Modulation
Portamento Time
Data Entry
Portamento
Sound Controller
Sound Controller
RPN Inc,Dec
NRPN LSB,MSB
RPN LSB,MSB
*1
Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO
Ø
: Yes
˛
: No
CP300 Owner’s Manual
137
Specifications
Keyboard
Item
Sound Source
Polyphony (max.)
Voice Selection
Performance
Effect
Controller
Display
Recording/Playback
Jacks/Connectors
Main Amplifiers
Speakers
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Weight
Accessories
CP300
GH keyboard 88 keys (A-1 – C7)
AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling
128
Panel preset for manual Performance: 50 Voices
XG Voices: 480 Voices + 12 Drum kits
64 Performamces x 56 files (max.)
Reverb
*1
, Chorus
*1
, Master Equalizer, Variation effect
*1
, Insertion effect
*1
x 3
Master Volume Dial, Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel, Master Equalizer Slider, Zone Control
Slider, Song Volume Slider
24 charaters x 2 lines, LCD with back-light
16-track recording/playback, Tempo adjustment, max. capacity: 1.4 MB, 140,000 notes
MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), PHONES, INPUT (L/MONO, R), OUTPUT (L/MONO, R), OUTPUT (L/R),
ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL (SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO/SOFT/AUX), USB TO HOST, AC INLET
30 W x 2
13 cm x 2
1391 x 461 x 166mm (54-3/4" x 18-1/8" x 6-1/2")
32.5 kg (71 lbs., 10 oz)
AC Power Cord, Foot Pedal FC3, Owner’s Manual
*1: Refer to the Effect type on page 114.
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
138
CP300 Owner’s Manual
Index
Numerics
[1] – [16] buttons .......................................................... 73
A
A [–][+] buttons ............................................................ 15
[AC INLET] jack ............................................................ 11
Application Index .......................................................... 10
[ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jacks ............................. 11
[AUX] jack ..................................................................... 33
AUX pedal .................................................................... 33
B
B [– (NO)][+(YES)] buttons ........................................... 15
Bar ................................................................................ 42
Basic operation ............................................................. 15
Bulk Dump .................................................................... 66
C
C [–][+] button .............................................................. 15
Character Code ............................................................ 84
Chorus .......................................................................... 35
[CHORUS] button ......................................................... 35
Click .............................................................................. 38
[CLICK] button .............................................................. 38
Connections
computer ................................................................ 92
external audio equipment ...................................... 88
external instrument ................................................ 89
external MIDI keyboard ......................................... 90
[CONTRAST] knob ....................................................... 13
Current memory ............................................................ 82
D
D [–][+] buttons ............................................................ 15
Delete
Performance file ..................................................... 80
Song file ................................................................. 83
Demo Songs ................................................................. 23
Display
adjust the brightness ............................................. 13
settings .................................................................. 15
Dual .............................................................................. 29
E
Effect Data Assign Table ............................................ 123
Effect Parameter List .................................................. 115
Effect Type List ........................................................... 114
Equalizer (EQ) .............................................................. 36
[EXIT] button ................................................................. 15
F
Factory Set .............................................................. 16, 71
Factory Setting List ..................................................... 101
Factory-programmed settings ...................................... 16
Fast Forward ................................................................. 50
Fast Rewind .................................................................. 50
File ................................................................................ 17
G
GM System Level 1 ..................................................... 100
H
Headphones ................................................................. 12
I
INPUT [L/MONO][R] jack .............................................. 89
Insertion effect .............................................................. 35
K
Keyboard part combinations ........................................ 27
L
Layer part ...................................................................... 27
Left Layer part ............................................................... 27
Left part ......................................................................... 27
List
Effect Parameter List ............................................ 115
Effect Type List .................................................... 114
Factory Setting List .............................................. 101
Master Settings .................................................... 102
Message List .......................................................... 94
MIDI Settings ........................................................ 101
Other Settings ...................................................... 101
Preset Performance List ....................................... 106
Program Change List ........................................... 105
Song Settings ....................................................... 102
Voice List .............................................................. 103
XG Drum Kit List ................................................... 112
XG Voice List ........................................................ 108
Load From Memory ....................................................... 79
M
Main part ....................................................................... 27
[MASTER] button .......................................................... 39
[MASTER EDIT] button ................................................. 53
Master EQ ..................................................................... 36
MASTER EQ EDIT [▼][▲] buttons ................................ 72
Master Equalizer settings ............................................. 72
[MASTER EQUALIZER] sliders ..................................... 36
Master mode ................................................................. 39
Master settings ............................................................. 53
Master Volume .............................................................. 13
[MASTER VOLUME] dial ............................................... 13
Memory ......................................................................... 49
Memory Backup ............................................................ 71
CP300 Owner’s Manual
139
Index
Message List ................................................................ 94
MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] connectors .............................. 90
MIDI channel ................................................................ 63
MIDI data compatibility ............................................... 100
MIDI Data Format ....................................................... 125
MIDI Implementation Chart ......................................... 137
[MIDI OUT] button ........................................................ 51
MIDI Panic .................................................................... 52
[MIDI SETTING] button ................................................. 64
MIDI Settings ................................................................ 63
Modulation wheel .......................................................... 34
O
[OTHER SETTING] button ............................................ 67
Other Settings ............................................................... 67
OUTPUT [L/MONO][R] jacks ........................................ 88
OUTPUT [L][R] jacks .................................................... 89
P
Panel Lock .................................................................... 51
[PANEL LOCK] button .................................................. 51
Parameter
Master Edit ............................................................. 54
MIDI Settings ......................................................... 65
Other Settings ........................................................ 68
Song Settings ......................................................... 86
Voice Edit ............................................................... 58
Part EQ ......................................................................... 36
Pedal ............................................................................. 33
Pedal functions ....................................................... 61, 62
Perf. Name .................................................................... 78
[PERFORM.FILE] button ............................................... 76
Performance ................................................................. 77
rename ................................................................... 78
save to a button ..................................................... 77
[PERFORMANCE] button ............................................. 40
Performance file
basic operation ...................................................... 76
defined ................................................................... 73
delete ..................................................................... 80
recall from the storage memory ............................. 79
rename ................................................................... 80
save as ................................................................... 79
Performance functions .................................................. 73
Performance parameters .............................................. 74
[PHONES] jack ............................................................. 12
Pitch Bend wheel .......................................................... 34
[POWER] switch ..................................................... 11, 12
Precautions ..................................................................... 4
Preset ...................................................................... 18, 49
Preset Performance file ................................................ 40
Preset Performance List ............................................. 106
Program Change List .................................................. 105
Q
Quantize ....................................................................... 86
R
[REC] button ................................................................. 42
Recording
Dual mode .............................................................. 48
live performance .............................................. 41, 42
Split mode .............................................................. 48
Recording Techniques
re-recording parts .................................................. 44
Recording track ............................................................ 42
Rename
Performance ........................................................... 78
Performance file ..................................................... 80
Song file ................................................................. 83
Rename File .................................................................. 80
Rename Song ............................................................... 83
Reverb .......................................................................... 35
[REVERB] button ........................................................... 35
S
Save
Performance ........................................................... 77
Performance file ..................................................... 79
Recorded Song ...................................................... 82
Save As ......................................................................... 79
Save To Memory ........................................................... 82
Scale ............................................................................. 68
[SOFT] jack ................................................................... 33
Soft pedal ...................................................................... 33
Song .............................................................................. 41
Song file
save to memory ...................................................... 82
Song playback .............................................................. 49
Song Repeat ................................................................. 87
SONG SELECT [
N][O] buttons .........................42, 49
Song Settings ................................................................ 85
[SONG VOLUME] slider ................................................ 47
[SOSTENUTO] jack ....................................................... 33
Sostenuto pedal ............................................................ 33
[SPEAKER] button ........................................................ 52
Speakers (built-in) On/Off ............................................. 52
Specifications ............................................................. 138
Split ............................................................................... 31
[SPLIT] button ............................................................... 31
Split Point ................................................................ 32, 69
Storage memory ............................................... 17, 73, 82
[SUSTAIN] jack ............................................................. 33
Sustain pedal ................................................................ 33
Synchro Start ................................................................ 50
System effect ................................................................ 35
140
CP300 Owner’s Manual
T
Tempo ........................................................................... 38
TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] buttons ...................................... 38
Time Signature .............................................................. 87
Touch ...................................................................... 61, 68
TRACK [1][2][3-16] buttons .................................... 42, 50
Transpose ..................................................................... 37
[TRANSPOSE] button ................................................... 37
Troubleshooting ............................................................ 98
Tune .............................................................................. 68
U
[USB] connector ........................................................... 92
V
VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons .......................................... 25
Voice ............................................................................. 25
Voice Edit ...................................................................... 56
[VOICE EDIT] button ..................................................... 56
Voice List .................................................................... 103
[VOICE/PERFORMANCE] button ...................... 25, 40, 73
Volume
adjusting each part ................................................ 28
adjusting Master Volume ................................. 13, 23
adjusting Song Volume .................................... 23, 47
X
XG ............................................................................... 100
XG Drum Kit List ......................................................... 112
XG Voice ....................................................................... 26
XG Voice List .............................................................. 108
Z
Zone Control ........................................................... 28, 39
[ZONE CONTROL] sliders ...................................... 28, 39
Index
CP300 Owner’s Manual
141
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,
6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
(2 wires)
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION:
POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU
FOND.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.
(polarity)
142
CP300 Owner’s Manual
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400
Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil
Tel: 011-3085-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
ASIA
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0660
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2445
SY37
This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
Yamaha Web Site (English only) http://www.yamahasynth.com/
Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2006 Yamaha Corporation
WG78300 602MWDH24.2-01A0
Printed in Japan
advertisement
Key Features
- 88-key Graded Hammer Effect (GHE) keyboard
- AWM2 sound engine with authentic piano sounds
- Built-in recorder
- Assignable foot pedal
- MIDI connectivity
- USB connectivity